You are on page 1of 177

Specification for Sucker Rods

,
Polished Rods and Liners, Couplings,
Sinker Bars, Polished Rod Clamps,
Stuffing Boxes, and Pumping Tees
API SPECIFICATION 11B
TWENTY-EIGTH EDITION, XXXXX 2017

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 9
STANDARD FOR SUCKER RODS, POLISHED RODS AND LINERS, COUPLINGS, SINKER
BARS, POLISHED ROD CLAMPS, STUFFING BOXES, AND PUMPING TEES ........................ 10
1 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES ..................................................................................................................................................... 10
3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 11
4 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND GAUGE LIST ....................................................................................................................... 16
5 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 20
6 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................. 20
7 MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................................................... 22
Table 1 – Single Sampling Plans for Normal Inspection, General Inspection Level I, AQL of 4% ....................................... 23
Table 2 – Single Sampling Plans for Normal Inspection, General Inspection Level II, AQL of 10% .................................... 24

ANNEX A ...................................................................................................................................... 26
API MONOGRAM PROGRAM ............................................................................................................ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
A.1 SCOPE .....................................................................................................................................ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.

ANNEX B ...................................................................................................................................... 31
THREAD FORM REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................................. 31
B.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 31
B.2 THREAD TYPES ................................................................................................................................................................... 31
B.3 THREAD FORM REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................... 32
Figure B.1 – Thread Form Illustration .................................................................................................................................. 33
Figure B.2 – Sucker Rod Pin with Sucker Rod Pin Thread (TSRP) Illustration.......................................................................... 34
Table B.1 – Dimensions for Sucker Rod Pins with Sucker Rod Pin Threads (TSRP) .................................................................. 34
Figure B.3 – Sucker Rod Coupling with Sucker Rod Box Thread (TSRB) Illustration ................................................................ 35
Table B.2 – Dimensions for Sucker Rod Couplings with Sucker Rod Box Threads (T SRB) ..................................................... 35
Figure B.4 – Polished Rod Pin with Polished Rod Pin Thread (TPRP) Illustration ................................................................... 36
Table B.3 – Dimensions for Polished Rod Pins with Polished Rod Pin Threads (TPRP)............................................................ 37
Figure B.5 – Polished Rod Coupling or Sub-coupling with Polished Rod Box Thread (TPRB) Illustration............................ 38
Table B.4 – Dimensions for Polished Rod Couplings or Sub-Couplings with Polished Rod Box Threads (T PRB) ................. 38
B.4 DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 39
Table B.6 – Dimensional Inspection ...................................................................................................................................... 39

ANNEX C ..................................................................................................................................... 43
STEEL SUCKER RODS AND PONY RODS ................................................................................................................................... 43
C.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 43
C.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................... 43
Figure C.1 – Steel Sucker Rod and Pony Rod Illustration ..................................................................................................... 43
1

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
Table C.1 – Dimensions for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods ............................................................................................. 44
Table C.2 – Customary Lengths for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods ................................................................................. 44
Table C.3 – Alternate Lengths for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods.................................................................................... 45
C.3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 45
Table C.4 – Grade, Chemical Composition, Mechanical Property, and Color Code Requirements for Steel Sucker Rods and
Pony Rods .............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
C.4 DIMENSIONAL AND SURFACE FINISH INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 47
Table C.5 – Dimensional Inspection of Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods ............................................................................ 47
C.5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 50
Table C.6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods ......................................... 51
C.6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................ 51
C.7 HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 52
C.8 ORDERING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................................... 54

ANNEX D ..................................................................................................................................... 55
FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) SUCKER RODS AND PONY RODS.................................................................................... 55
D.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 56
D.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................... 56
Figure D.1 – End Fitting Illustration ..................................................................................................................................... 56
Table D.1 – Dimensions for End Fittings............................................................................................................................... 56
1 End Fitting ......................................................................................................................................................................... 57
2 FRP Rod Body .................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Figure D.2 – Assembled FRP Sucker Rod and Pony Rod Illustration ................................................................................... 57
Table D.2 – Customary Lengths for FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods ................................................................................. 58
D.3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 58
Table D.3 – Grade, Chemical Composition, Mechanical Property and Color Code Requirements for End Fittings ........... 59
D.4 DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 60
Table D.4 – Dimensional Inspection of FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods ............................................................................ 60
D.5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 61
Table D.5 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Assembled FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods (temperature
rating in Fahrenheit) .............................................................................................................................................................. 62
Table D.6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Assembled FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods (temperature
rating in Celsius) .................................................................................................................................................................... 63
D.6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 63
D.7 HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ..................................................................... 64
D.8 ORDERING INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................................. 66

ANNEX E ...................................................................................................................................... 67
SINKER BARS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 67
E.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 67
E.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................... 67
Figure E.1 – Sinker Bar Illustration ...................................................................................................................................... 67
Table E.1 – Dimensions for Sinker Bars ................................................................................................................................ 68
Table E.2 – Customary Lengths for Sinker Bars .................................................................................................................... 68
E.3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................................. 69

2

.............................................................. This document is not an API Standard........................................................4 – Dimensional Inspection of Sinker Bars ........... 70 E....................................................................................................................................... outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.................................. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted....... it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard................ Mechanical Property...6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... Table E.... TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ............................................................. 80 Table F.......... 70 Table E........................................................................... and Color Code Marking Requirements for Sinker Bars ................. 78 POLISHED RODS................................................... 88 F............................................................. 85 F.........................3 – Customary Lengths for Polished Rods .................................................. 90 ANNEX G ....................................................................................2 –Hardness Determination of Base Metal.2 – Dimensions for EU Polished Rods .............................................................................................................................3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................. 73 E.............4 – Grade................ 86 Table F............................. Copyright API.................................. 95 3 ... 73 Table E.............................................................................................................2 – Dimensions for Slim Hole Couplings and Sub-couplings............................ 92 Table G...........................................7 HANDLING........ 94 1 Hardness Tester Penetrator .............................................................................................................1 GENERAL.......................................... 80 F....7 HANDLING........1 – Dimensions for NU Polished Rod ............. 81 Table F..........2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS...........................................6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS ...................... 79 Table F.......... 82 Table F.................. 95 3 Sprayed Metal Coating............... All rights reserved.......... 79 Figure F........................................................8 ORDERING INFORMATION ........................................................................ 75 E.............. 78 Table F........................................................................................................................................................................................3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ............ Polished Rod Coupling and Sub-coupling Illustration .........................................5 – Spray Metal Coating Chemical Composition ......... 91 Figure G...................................................... 95 2 Anvil or Table...................................................................... 69 E...................................................................................4 DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 78 F.................................................................................................................................................................................. 83 F.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 95 Figure G........................ 77 ANNEX F ............... 73 E.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 91 G............................................. 91 G................................. 91 COUPLINGS AND SUB-COUPLINGS ....................................................................................................... TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ...........................................................6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sinker Bars with Polished Rod Threads ........................................................8 ORDERING INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................................1 – Sucker Rod Coupling........ 84 Table F......................................................................................................................... Chemical Composition...... 93 G................................................6 – Dimensional Inspection of Polished Rods ......................... 78 Figure F......................................................................2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................. Mechanical Property and Color Code Requirements for Polished Rods .........................................................................................................................................................................................4 DIMENSIONAL AND SURFACE FINISH INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS ............... 95 5 Exposed Base Metal .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 95 4 Mid-point (approximate) ....... in whole or in part................................... 78 F.................. 88 F..........................5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS ............. 87 F..............................................7 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Polished Rods .................1 – NU Polished Rod Illustration .............................................2 – EU Polished Rod Illustration ........................5 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sinker Bars with Sucker Rod Threads ..............................................................................................................1 – Dimensions for Full Size Couplings and Sub-couplings ........................................... Chemical Composition....................................................................................................................... 92 Table G...........................3 – Grade.............................................................. 72 Table E..................................

..................................... 99 Table G............................................................................................................................... 97 3 Mid-thickness ................................................. ...................... 101 Table G........................................................... 104 H.................................................................. All rights reserved.................... 97 Va Measurement between successive indentations during a hardness test.................................4 – Spray Metal Coating Chemical Composition ...6 TOLERANCES ............. 112 H.............................................................................2 – P5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Illustration ........................... 109 Figure H............................ 104 H............................ Table G............ 115 H...................................5 POLISHED ROD PIN CONNECTIONS ................... 117 4 ......................3 – Grade................................................................. 106 Figure H............................................ 96 Table G................................................................. 115 Table H.................................................................6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sucker Rod Couplings ..............................................................................................................8 –Tolerances for Gauges .....................................................................................7 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Polished Rod Couplings ....................................................... outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept............................................................................................................................................. 103 ANNEX H ................6 – P1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Illustration ............. 97 Figure G.................................... TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 98 Table G................................... Mechanical Properties and Product Marking for Couplings and Sub-couplings ................................................................7 HANDLING................................................... in whole or in part......................................................................................4 BOX CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 101 G.. Chemical Composition....................................... 112 Table H............ 101 G............................... 97 4 Coating Thickness .........................2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...............................5 – B6 No-go Box-thread Plug Gauge Illustration ..........8 ORDERING INFORMATION ...................................................5 – Dimensional Inspection of Sucker Rod Couplings... It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted..... 112 Figure H....... 105 Figure H........... it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard..............................................4 DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION ..................................... 103 H.. 116 Table H................................................................... 102 G...................................................................... 97 G................ 113 Table H.................................. 100 Table G... 113 Figure H......................................................................................................................... 109 Table H...........................7 – Dimensions for P3 Pin-cone Plug Gauge and P4 Pin-cone Ring Gauge .............................................6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ......... This document is not an API Standard.........................................................................................................4 – B3 Box-cone Ring Gauge and B4 Box-cone Plug Gauge Illustration ........6 – Dimensions for P1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge ........................1 – Dimensions for P7 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge ... 116 H................................................3 – Vickers Micro-hardness Determination of Spray Metal Coating ......... 108 Table H.................. 108 Figure H.......................................................3 SUCKER ROD PIN CONNECTIONS ....3 – B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge Illustration ................................................................... 97 2 Base Metal................................ 98 G..............8 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sub-couplings .................. 106 Table H.................................................3 – Dimensions for B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge ..................................................................................................................................... 103 THREAD GAUGE SPECIFICATION FOR SUCKER ROD AND POLISHED ROD CONNECTIONS .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4 – Dimensions for B3 Box-cone Ring Gauge and B4 Box-cone Plug Gauge.......5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS .....................................9 – Allowable Axial Variation of Shoulder Face ........... 116 Table H.................................2 – Dimensions for P5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge 108 H.................................................................................................................................1 GENERAL ................... 110 Table H................................................... Copyright API...... Polished Rod Couplings and Sub-couplings ..............................................................7 AXIAL VARIATION ...................................5 – Dimensions for B6 No-go Box-thread Plug Gauge ........................... 96 1 Spray Metal Coating .8 MARKING REQUIREMENTS (BY MANUFACTURER) ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 110 Figure H................1 – P7 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Illustration .7 – P3 Pin-cone Plug Gauge and P4 Pin-cone Ring Gauge Illustration ............................ 116 H..............................................................

..............................................................................................................................5 MARKING ............................................................ 120 PUMPING TEES ..................................................3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS . 123 Table I................ 120 Figure I.....................1 – Grade....12 REFERENCE MASTER GAUGE MARKING (BY CERTIFYING AGENCY) .................................................................. 137 K....................................1 – Test Rods .................................................................................... 121 Table I.....................................................10 REFERENCE MASTER GAUGE CERTIFICATION........6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 122 I.... 131 J.................................................. 135 Figure K....... 119 ANNEX I .......... 118 H........................................................................................ 128 Table J..................1 – Stuffing Box Illustration ......................................... 132 J................................................................................. 120 I................................................................................................................................................................................. 136 K......................... it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard............................................................. 135 POLISHED ROD CLAMPS .....................1 GENERAL ............................................................................7 HANDLING.............................. 135 K...............................1 – Pumping Tee Illustration..................................................................................................................................................11 REFERENCE MASTER GAUGE CERTIFICATION AGENCIES ............................ 129 J.....................................2 – Example of Product Identification Marking .............................................. 124 I..........................................................................................................................................8 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................. 127 STUFFING BOXES .............................................3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ................ 118 H............................9 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................... in whole or in part....................................................................... Table H.................................................... 127 J..........7 HANDLING....................................................................................................................2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...........................4 INSPECTION AND TESTING ................................................................................................................................... 138 5 ...4 INSPECTING AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................................4 INSPECTING AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................3 – Example of Stuffing Box Assembly Product Identification Marking..........8 ORDERING INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 117 H..................................................1 GENERAL ...........................................................................13 RE-CERTIFICATION OF REFERENCE MASTER GAUGES .................................................................................................... 128 J...................2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............... 126 ANNEX J .................................... It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted................................................................................................................ Copyright API........................................... All rights reserved................................. 133 ANNEX K ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120 I..................................................................1 – Polished Rod Clamps ............................................................ TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ..................5 MARKING ................................................ Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties .................................................................................................1 – Grade.. Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties for Pumping Tees .... 136 Table K...................................................... 125 I.......................................................................... 131 Table J..................6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 132 J.................................................................................................... 121 I................................................................................................................................................1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 124 I....................................... 122 I........... 135 K...................................................................................... 130 Table J................................. 118 H. 138 K.................................................................................................. 128 J.........................10 – Example of Gauge Marking ......................................5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS ...............3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................. 127 J......................................................................................... This document is not an API Standard.................................................................. 127 Figure J........... 119 H.......2 – Example of Stuffing Box Body Product Identification Marking .......................................................................................................................................................................2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................ outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept...................................................................................................................................................... TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ...

.............................................................1 – Polished Rod Liner Sizes .................................................... FRP END FITTINGS... 154 Figure M............................................................................................... 151 M......................... SINKER BARS..... 158 M......... 141 CALIBRATION OF MEASURING EQUIPMENT .............................................................................4 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS ......................... This document is not an API Standard........................................1 SCOPE ..2 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 161 ANNEX N ............................................................................................................ 159 M.....................................................9 SPEED OF TESTING................................................................................................................ TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ............................................6 REFERENCE MASTER GAUGES......................................................................................... 139 K....................................................1 – Polished Rod Liner .....................................................................................................1 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................................... 140 ANNEX L ................................................................................................................................................1 GENERAL ............2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . 159 M.............. 141 L.............................................................................................................................. 163 POLISHED ROD LINERS ... it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard....................2 – Type A Specimen Dimension .................................................................................... 153 M.........................3 – Type B Specimen Dimensions ....................................... 155 Figure M..................................... 152 M......................... 157 Table M...............................................................................................................................1 – Full Body Test Specimen ........ 152 M.........................................................4 – Type B Machined Test Specimen ..........................................11 DOCUMENTATION..... 163 N...................................................................................................................................... Table K......2 – Example of Product Identification Marking ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 150 L.... 163 Figure N.............................................. 157 Figure M........................ 156 Table M............................................................. 163 N.................................................... 142 L.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 CHEMICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS.......5 – Type C Machined Test Specimen .................................................... 141 L................................ 156 Figure M............................................................................................................................... 151 M............ POLISHED RODS.................................................10 REQUIRED REPORTING FROM TESTING ................................ Copyright API................................................3 INDEX OF EQUIPMENT CALIBRATIONS ...................................................................................................4 MECHANICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS ......6 TESTING ................................................................................................................................................................................. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept..................6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ............................................. 151 M.................................................. All rights reserved................................................................................................. 139 K..................................................................8 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................2 – Full Body Test Specimen with Gauge Marks ................7 PRODUCT SAMPLING METHODS .........................7 HANDLING............................................ 158 Table M.................................................................................................................................................2 GENERAL ....................................................... 154 Table M....................................1 – Type of Test Specimens by Product......................... in whole or in part...................................................................................................3 – Type A Machined Test Specimen ...........3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ....... 139 K........................................................................................................... 151 STANDARD METHOD OF MECHANICAL PROPERTIES TESTING OF PRODUCTS MADE FROM BAR STOCK AND TUBING (STEEL SUCKER RODS AND PONY RODS................................................................ It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted................... 164 N.......................................... 164 Table N.............................. 150 ANNEX M ..................8 TYPES OF TEST SPECIMENS .................................................................................................................................................................5 MINIMUM PROCEDURE(S) REQUIREMENTS .........................................5 GENERAL INFORMATION ON WORKING GAUGES AND CALIBRATION STANDARDS .......... 153 M.................................4 – Type C Specimen Dimensions ........... 152 M..................................................................................................................... 142 L............................................................................................... AND COUPLINGS AND SUB- COUPLINGS) ................. 141 L.............................................................................................................................. 155 Figure M........ 164 6 .............................................

...........................5 MARKING REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................................................................................9 – underfill in the upset bead ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 – spray metal porosity ................ 172 Figure O.. 167 N. 172 Figure O............................................... 173 Figure O..........10 – underfill in the pin shoulder ........................................... 172 Figure O........................................................................................................................... 170 Figure O......................................... 169 Figure O......... 171 Figure O................................. 169 Figure O...............................................................................12 – underfill in the pin nose ................... 171 Figure O........................................................................... 171 Figure O............................................ 168 REPRESENTATIVE EXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUITIES ...............................................6 – overfill in the upset taper ............................ 173 Figure O................11 – underfill in the stress relief ............... 172 Figure O..................................................................................................23 – straightener burn .............................................................................................................. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF FINISHED PRODUCTS ................................. 169 Figure O.............................32 – atmospheric corrosion pitting in raw bar stock ................................... 165 N................................................................................ 173 Figure O........................................................................................................ 167 N............. 171 Figure O...15 – underfill in the upset taper.......................................................................................................7 – scab in the stress relief that has popped out ......................................... 174 7 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................30 – overfill in the rod body .................................. 170 Figure O..........2 – Example of Product Identification Marking ........................ it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard..........................18 – step face ....................................................................13 – underfill in the pin nose ...................................................................................................................................................................... 172 Figure O..........................3 – forging defect in the face of the pin shoulder ..........................................................................21 – dent in the rod body .......................................................................................................... 170 Figure O............................................. 171 Figure O....................... 170 Figure O.........22 – marks from a furnace conveyor system.............................................................................................. 172 Figure O....................19 – step face and surface roughness ............................................................................... 169 Figure O...........................................................................................................................................................................................................20 – tool mark in the stress relief .................. 173 Figure O............................................34 – seam in the rod body.......................17 – worn rolling die .......... 174 Figure O...................................................................................................14 – underfill in the pin shoulder and wrench square ..............................31 – pit in the rod body from scale that has popped out....................... This document is not an API Standard............................16 – incomplete face ..........................................................................................7 HANDLING....................................................................... outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept..................................................................................................................................................................................... 166 Table N..........6 FINISHED PRODUCT PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS .5 – fold in the stress relief ..................27 – fold in the rod body............................................24 – end shear crack in raw bar stock ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 169 Figure O........................................29 – mill scale impressions in the rod body...............................................................................................................................................................................................................28 – lap in the rod body ...........................4 INSPECTING AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS........................... 172 Figure O.............................................. 168 ANNEX O ............. 172 Figure O.... 173 Figure O.............35 – surface shearing from foreign matter in the sizing dies ........ 170 Figure O............................................................................................................................................... It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.......................................2 – spray metal pullback ......................................................................... 167 N.............8 – sliver in the upset taper that has popped out ........ 173 Figure O..............36 – surface shearing from foreign matter in the sizing dies .............. 171 Figure O..................................................................................... All rights reserved... Copyright API......................................26 – end shear crack extended through the upset taper ............................4 – black face threads .......................25 – end shear crack exposed during machining .......................... 173 Figure O..................................................... 169 Figure O........... N................................ 173 Figure O...........................................8 ORDERING INFORMATION ........................................... in whole or in part......................................................................33 – rolled-in-scale in the bar stock ................................................................ 170 Figure O....................................................................................... 169 Figure O....

................................................................................................................................1 – SUCKER ROD PUMPING SYSTEM ILLUSTRATION .............................................. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard................... in whole or in part..................................................... All rights reserved.. 176 BIBLIOGRAPHY . Copyright API...... outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept................. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted......................... 176 8 .................................................................... 175 FIGURE P.... This document is not an API Standard..................................................... 175 SUCKER ROD PUMPING SYSTEM ILLUSTRATION ........................... ANNEX P ............................

USC units shall be the controlling units. Copyright API. expressed in International System (SI) units. This can be particularly applicable where there is innovative or developing technology. All rights reserved. This Standard is not intended to inhibit a manufacturer from offering. Attention is brought to users of this Standard that requirements above those outlined in this Standard can be required for individual applications. normative Annexes L through M providing for the calibration of measuring equipment and mechanical properties testing requirements. couplings and sub-couplings. thread gauges. either in parentheses in the text or on separate data sheets. where practical. polished rods. Furthermore. purchasers. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. In this Standard. in whole or in part. and informative Annexes N through P for polished rod liners. pumping tees. polished rod clamps. this S t a n d a r d addresses the minimum requirements with which the manufacturer shall comply in order to claim conformity. stuffing boxes. standard methods of mechanical properties testing and polished rod liners. 9 . quantities expressed in United States Customary (USC) units are also. sucker rods. it is the responsibility of the manufacturer to identify any variations from this Standard. Where an alternative is offered. This document is not an API Standard. representative examples of discontinuities and a sucker rod pumping system illustration. Included within this S t a n d a r d are normative Annexes B t h r o u g h K specifying equipment requirements. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. suppliers and manufacturers and is intended for use in the petroleum and natural gas industry worldwide. calibration of measuring equipment. manufacture and selection of thread form requirements. or the user or purchaser from accepting alternative equipment or other engineering solutions. This Standard is intended to give requirements and information to all parties in the design. sinker bars. Introduction This Standard has been developed by users. SI units are included as a convenience for the user of this Standard.

normative Annexes L through M providing for the calibration of measuring equipment and mechanical properties testing requirements. Sinker Bars. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. stuffing boxes. These references are normative only to the applicable product Annex. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. sucker rod rotators. Stuffing Boxes. on-off tools. Tubing. sinker bars. stabilizer bars. shear tools. For dated references. polished rod clamps. Gauging and Inspection of Casing. Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures ASTM A536. Copyright API. However. Standard Test Method for Apparent Horizontal Shear Strength of Pultruded Reinforced Plastic Rods by the Short-Beam Method 10 . 2 Normative References The following referenced documents are indispensable for the application of this Standard. Specification for Threading. This document is not an API Standard. operation and maintenance of these products are not included in this Standard. Standard Test Methods. Polished Rods and Liners. and Pumping Tees 1 Scope This Standard provides the requirements and guidelines for the design of thread form requirements. Tubing and Line Pipe Threads API Recommended Practice 5B1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. representative examples of discontinuities and a sucker rod pumping system illustration. Recommended Practice for Personal Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Test ASTM A395. sucker rods. Gauging and Thread Inspection of Casing. or interface connections for stuffing boxes and pumping tees. Also. couplings and sub-couplings. Practices. polished rods. and informative Annexes N through P for polished rod liners. All rights reserved. calibration of measuring equipment. thread gauges. installation. sealing elements used in stuffing boxes. the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies. Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Casting ASTM A751. Standard Test Method for Indention Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor ASTM D2584. API 11BR has information on operation and maintenance of these products. The Standard does not cover sucker rod guides. Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins ASTM D4475. standard methods of mechanical properties testing and polished rod liners as defined herein for use in the sucker rod lift method for the petroleum and natural gas industry. For undated references. pumping tees. Standard for Sucker Rods. Polished Rod Clamps. Annexes B t h r o u g h K specifying equipment requirements. The formulation and publication of API Specifications and the API monogram program are not intended in any way to inhibit the purchase of products from companies not licensed to use the API monogram. only the edition cited applies. and Line Pipe Threads ASNT SNT-TC-1A. and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products ASTM D2583. Couplings. in whole or in part. API Specification 5B.

3 Terms and Definitions For the purpose of this document the following terms and definitions apply. Copyright API.1. 3. but not accompanied by a loss of metal. 3.4 bundle a collection of sucker rods. or polished rods from the surface to the subsurface pump where both threads are of the same size and type. polished rods. All rights reserved. etc. 3.10 end shear crack mill shear discontinuity. For quality system related terms used in this Standard and not defined below. 3.8 dent local change in surface contour caused by mechanical impact.7 crate an enclosed container used for transporting or storing product. 3. see API Q1. 3. in whole or in part. and laminations. pony rods.. This document is not an API Standard. pony rods. 3.6 couplings internally threaded components used to connect sucker rods. see Figure C. 3.3 body holding pressure the rated pressure the outer housing(s) of the stuffing box assembly or pumping tee is designed to contain.5 continuous processing material flowing steadily through the processing equipment in an undefined quantity or volume.1 batch lot processing material processed in a machine in defined quantities or volumes. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. seams. pits. 3. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 3. laps. sinker bars.11 fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) sucker rod or pony rod sucker rod or pony rod typically manufactured in three pieces and assembled by a process that provides connection of two metal end-fittings connected to a non-metallic fiber reinforced plastic rod body. tied or wrapped up together without specific spacers. sinker bars. which shows as a crack across the pin end face.9 discontinuity interruption in the normal physical structure or configuration such as cracks. 11 . 3.2 body the length of the rod located between the upset transitions.

heat number. date of manufacture. and chemical composition of the grade of steel and heat number. Also known as the manufacturer’s heat code.23 material test report (MTR) a certified document provided by a mill or processor for a specific melt of steel that states the date of manufacture.16 heat treatment is the controlled heating and cooling of metals to alter their physical and mechanical properties without changing the product shape.20 ksi kilopounds per square is a scale unit derived from pound per square inch (psi). 3. yield strength. All rights reserved.21 longitudinal direction along the long axis of the rod that is parallel to the direction of maximum elongation in a worked material. 3.18 independent calibration agency organization providing calibration services that is independent of the manufacturer. Copyright API. 3.12 forging lap discontinuity produced when two metal surfaces fold against each other without metallurgical bonding. reduction of area.).17 hydrocarbon removable coating (HRC) a temporary coating used to provide atmospheric corrosion protection for products listed in the Standard that is soluble in produced hydrocarbons.15 heat code product identification marks that traces the specific chemical composition of the steel with respect to the material test report (MTR) from the steel mill. 3. as applicable. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. mechanical properties (e. This document is not an API Standard.g.14 furnace lot used for quality control purposes to identify when a partial amount of product is processed at a defined temperature and rate and is traceable to the original heat number of the product. in whole or in part. 3. tight bend. 3. 3. 3. 3. and hardness. chemical composition. tensile strength.. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.13 forging overfill excessive metal stocking of the forging die resulting in a forging lap. 3.000 psi. 3. equivalent to 1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 12 . 3.19 kink short. elongation.22 longitudinal discontinuity discontinuity where the orientation of the long axis of the discontinuity is within plus or minus 60 degrees from the longitudinal direction and is longer in the longitudinal direction than in the transverse direction. etc.

3. 3. wear.33 processor a supplier or company that transforms (metallurgically. reusable tool that provides a means of remotely connecting and disconnecting the sucker rods at or above the sucker rod pump. or pumping tee is designed to contain.26 on-off tools two-piece.32 pony rod sucker rod of reduced length used to place the pump at the desired depth in the well. 3. which in conjunction with the pumping unit carrier bar. etc. with seal section and packing. 3. or other mechanically assisted degradation. 3.24 micro-crack crack undetectable by unaided visual inspection.34 pull back discontinuity in the spray metal coating where the coating does not extend to its intended surface coverage. 3. 13 . secures a polished rod to the surface pumping unit. 3. in the surface of a material created by exposure to the environment. All rights reserved.29 polished rod rod of standard length and diameter with a surface finish designed to facilitate a pressure seal in a stuffing box and to provide a mechanical link between equipment inside and outside the well. Copyright API.25 nick local change is surface contour accompanied by a loss in metal caused by mechanical impact.30 polished rod clamp device attached to the polished rod. thin-walled tube that is installed over and seals against the polished rod and stuffing box internal seals. 3. regular or irregular crater or cavity.31 polished rod liner a hard.27 operating working pressure the rated pressure the stuffing box assembly. for example by corrosion. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.) product that will later be reprocessed by the manufacturer of equipment under this Standard. in whole or in part. 3. 3. 3. dimensionally. spray metal. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. This document is not an API Standard.28 pit a small. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.

or storing. 3. 14 .40 rod rotator mechanical device that rotates the rod string to circumferentially distribute wear.42 rolled-in-scale surface discontinuity caused by scale (metal oxide) formed during a previous heating which has not been removed prior to bar rolling or upset forging. 3. gained through training and/or experience as measured against established requirements.38 rod guides metallic or polymeric materials attached to the rod string to centralize the sucker rods and reduce sucker rod and tubing wear and/or reduce paraffin build-up.41 rod string assembly of sucker rods. 3. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. polished rod. All rights reserved. in whole or in part. and sinker bars with non-abrasive spacers to avoid metal-to-metal contact and bending during handling. as required. fins. Copyright API. pony rods. 3. or sharp corners being folded over and then rolled into the bar surface without metallurgical bonding. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. designed to discharge production fluids through a side opening connected to a flow line.36 qualified person personnel with characteristics or abilities. 3. 3. to actuate a subsurface rod pump. 3. standards or tests that enable the individual to perform a required function. sinker bars. 3. pony rods.44 rolling overfill raised ridges formed during bar rolling.37 reference master gauge gauge which has been certified by an independent calibration agency and is used for verification and calibration of working gauges. 3.43 rolling lap longitudinal surface discontinuity that can have the appearance of a seam.35 pumping tee tubing fitting assembled to the top of a pumping well and below a stuffing box. couplings.45 scab (sliver) loose or torn segment of material or debris longitudinally rolled into the surface of the bar. caused during rolling. and a polished rod clamp. 3. transportation. sub-couplings.39 rod pallet a strapped package of sucker rods. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. This document is not an API Standard. 3.

which can have the appearance of a straight line. 3. 3. scratch. 15 .X.53 sucker rod steel or fiber reinforced plastic rod (FRP) of standard length and diameter with externally threaded ends. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. sucker rods.50 stabilizer bars special pony rod with rod guides. normally in a larger diameter than the sucker rod. 3.48 shear tool straight line pull safety joint release that provides a means of disconnecting the rod string from the pump below the tool. This document is not an API Standard.56 thread flank the side of the thread between the crest and root of the thread. normally used above the pump or between the sinker bars.54 sucker rod body the portion of the sucker rod or pony rod between the upset tapers. typically used for transmitting mechanical power to the subsurface pump. where both threads are not of the same size. 3. condensate. 3.51 stuffing box device with accessory sealing elements used in conjunction with the polished rod to facilitate sealing of the well bore. to the subsurface pump. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Copyright API. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved. or sinker bars. water. 3. 3. and/or gas) from a well with a sucker rod string and subsurface rod pump operating in a linear reciprocating mode. or to each other.52 sub-couplings internally threaded components with polished rod threads used to connect polished rods.57 thread rolling and thread forming processes thread rolling and thread forming processes are manufacturing methods where threads are formed by cold pressing a shaped tool into the material to form the material into the desired shape.47 shake test perceptible movement of the gauge when rocked back and forth.55 sucker rod lift artificial lift method that lift fluids (oil. see Annex H. 3. 3. pony rods. 3.46 seam longitudinal discontinuity which can be closed or open. 3. 3. in whole or in part.49 sinker bar a steel rod of a specified length. but without metallurgical bonding. or small longitudinal separation. provided in standard sized with externally threaded ends provided to add weight and stability to the rod string.

End Fitting DEN Diameter. Contact Face Minor DFE Diameter. Box Major DB2 Diameter.59 underfill portion of the upset forging with a depression (typically insufficient metal) formed during forging. Contact Face Major DF2 Diameter. Polished Rod DPS Diameter.58 transverse discontinuity discontinuity where the orientation of the long axis of the discontinuity is within plus or minus 30 degrees from the transverse direction and is longer in the transverse direction than in the longitudinal direction. 3. Cold forming threads by rolling or forming increases the yield strength and hardness properties while wear resistance is increased and surface roughness is reduced since the threads are cold formed versus being cut. 3. Pin Major DP2 Diameter. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 4 Symbols. Pin Minor DPP Diameter.61 working gauge gauge used for direct measurement of product.60 upset transition the end of the rod where the rod body diameter increases to the upset bead. Rod Body 16 . Non-coated Length (applies to polished rods with spray metal coating – only) DP1 Diameter. Pin Pitch DPR Diameter. Pin and Box Cone Base DCS Diameter. Thread Chamfer DB1 Diameter.1 Symbols Symbols used within this Standard are defined as follows. Note a “rolling die” is used when an external (pin) thread is rolled while a “tap” is used to form internal (box) threads for couplings and sub-couplings. This document is not an API Standard. 9° Pin Cone ATC Angle. All rights reserved. Pin Shoulder DRB Diameter. 3. Symbol Description APC Angle. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Copyright API. Abbreviations and Gauge List 4. Couplings and Sub-couplings DEF Diameter. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Elevator Neck DF1 Diameter. 3. End Fitting Extension DNL Diameter. Box Pitch DCB Diameter. Box Minor DBC Diameter. in whole or in part. Box Counterbore DBP Diameter.

Pin Shoulder before the Start of the Wrench Flat (including fillets) LPP Length. Upset Bead RUT Radius. Coupling and Sub-coupling RPS Radius or Chamfer. Pin Shoulder to Elevator Neck LSH Length. Wrench Flat LWS Length. Sinker Bar LSE Length. Elevator Neck LPF Length. Polished Rod LPS Length. Perfect Thread LRD Length. To 9° Pin Cone LWF Length. Stress Relief DUB Diameter. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Upset Transition SNT Size. Polished Rod Pin TSRB Threads. Sinker Bar DSH Diameter. Total Depth of Box LBT Length. All rights reserved. Wrench Flat WWS Width. Between Wrench Flats LBC Length. DSB Diameter. Shank to 9° Angle LSP Length. in whole or in part. Stress Relief RUB Radius. Calculated from LSH + LPT + LTC LPR Length. P2 Go Pin-Thread Ring Gauge SP4 Standoff. This document is not an API Standard. End Fitting LEN Length. Perfect Box Thread LCB Length. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. P4 Pin-cone Ring Gauge TPRB Threads. Nominal Thread SP2 Standoff. Copyright API. Wrench Square RCS Radius or Chamfer. Wrench Square 17 . Pin Shoulder RSH Radius. Sucker Rod Pin WWF Width. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Spray Metal Coating Transition LTC Length. To Pin and Box Cone Base LCS Length. Upset Bead DWF Distance. Box Counterbore LBD Length. Steel or FRP Sucker Rod and/or Pony Rod LSB Length. Steel or FRP Sucker Rod and/or Pony Rod Pin Thread LSR Length. Pin Shank DSR Diameter. Pin Shank RSR Radius. Pin Shoulder LPT Length. Sucker Rod Box TSRP Threads. Coupling and Sub-coupling LEF Length. Stress Relief LST Length. Polished Rod Box TPRP Threads.

Box-cone Plug B4Bs Diameter. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Box-cone Ring B3Df Diameter. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Ring Collar B3Drc Diameter. Thread B3 Gauge. Pitch B2Lp Length. Plug Collar B4Dpc Diameter. Gauge Point of Cone B4Ls Length. All rights reserved. Symbol Description B2 Gauge.2 Abbreviations Abbreviations used within this Standard are defined as follows.3 Gauge List Symbols used within the Standard for gauges are defined as follows. Abbreviation Description ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute AQL acceptable quality level ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASNT American Society for Non-Destructive Testing ASQ American Society for Quality ASTM ASTM International FRP fiber reinforced plastic HRC Hydrocarbon Removable Coating ISO International Organization for Standardization MTR material test report NACE NACE International NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NDE non-destructive examination OD outside diameter ROA reduction of area SPC Society for Protective Coatings UN unified national UNR unified national rounded UNS unified numbering system (for steel grades) 4. Thread 18 . Major B4Df Diameter. Minor B3Lr Length. This document is not an API Standard. Relief B4Es Diameter. Plug B2Ls Length. Major B2Df Diameter. Go Box thread Plug B2Bs Diameter. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. Pitch B4Lgp Length. 4. Plug Collar B2Dtr Diameter. Thread Relief B2Es Diameter. Ring Cone B3Ks Diameter. Ring B4 Gauge. Plug Cone at Gauge Point B4Dtr Diameter. in whole or in part.

Plug P3Ls Length. Major P3Df Diameter. Thread P5Lst Length. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Plug or Ring Collar P7Dtr Diameter. Plug Cone at Gauge Point P3Dtr Diameter. B6 Gauge. Pin-cone Plug P3Bs Diameter. Minor P2Lf Length. Minor P3Lr Length. Truncated Portion P6 Gauge. Truncated Major P7Df Diameter. Pin-cone Ring P4Df Diameter. Pitch P3Lgp Length. Thread P1 Gauge. All rights reserved. To Gauge Point of Cone P3Lp Length. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. No-go Pin-thread Ring P6Ks Diameter. Thread P4 Gauge. This document is not an API Standard. Go Pin-thread Ring P2Df Diameter. No-go Box-thread Plug B6Bs Diameter. Ring Cone P4Ks Diameter. Full Form Major P1Bst Diameter. Thread Relief P1Es Diameter. Truncated Portion P2 Gauge. Ring Collar P2Dq Diameter. in whole or in part. Counterbore P2Ks Diameter. Plug Collar P1Dtr Diameter. Plug or Ring Collar P4Drc Diameter. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Ring P7 Gauge. Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug P1Bs Diameter. Thread Relief P7Es Diameter. Thread Relief P3Es Diameter. Truncated Major P1Df Diameter. Pitch B6Ls Length. Ring P5 Gauge. Major B6Es Diameter. Ring Minor P6Lr Length. Copyright API. Plug Collar P3Dpc Diameter. Plug P1Ls Length. Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug P7Bs Diameter. Truncated Major P5Es Diameter. Full Form Major P7Bst Diameter. Pitch 19 . Thread P1Lst Length. Pitch P5Ls Length. No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug P5Bs Diameter. Ring P3 Gauge. Full Form Major P5Bst Diameter. Pitch P1Lp Length.

if applicable. specify the requirements and/or identify the supplier’s or manufacturers specific products. tubing size. Ring 5 Functional Requirements To order products which conform to this Standard. or other suitable documentation. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Truncated Portion ( /2 of P7Ls) P8 Gauge. data sheet. scale. d) Well bore configuration (such as deviation. Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge P8Df Diameter. The following requirements may be specified as applicable: a) Required fluid volume or loads to be applied to the products. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. g) Pressure ratings. h) Bottom hole static temperature and pressure. Plug P7Ls Length. Requirements may be conveyed to the manufacturer by means of the manufacturer’s part number. dog-legs. b) Material type and grade. shall be considered as meeting the requirements of this Standard. Plug or Ring Collar P8Dq Diameter. including produced solids (sand production. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 6 Technical Requirements 6.). Additional detailed ordering information can be found in Annexes C through L. 27 edition. in whole or in part. the user or purchaser may determine the applicable well and environmental operational conditions. i) Planned chemical treatments. c) Well depth. etc. Minor P8Lq Length. 20 . or other mechanical well parameters. All rights reserved. etc. Thread 1 P7Lst Length. pump size. Counterbore P8Lr Length.) to which the products are exposed during their full cycle. f) The selected surface drive system. j) Bottom hole producing temperature and pressure. This document is not an API Standard.1 General Requirements th Products designed and manufactured prior to the publication of this Standard and in conformance with API 11B. P7Lp Length. e) Produced fluid chemical and physical composition. Counterbore P8Ks Diameter. Copyright API.

6. couplings.6 Design Changes Design changes and changes to design documents that affect conformance to this Standard shall require application of the same control features as those used to develop the original design. 6.2. 6.2.3 Materials 6. formulas.5 Design Validation Design validation shall be performed to ensure that the resulting product is capable of meeting the requirements for the specified application or intended use. This document is not an API Standard. calculations. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Design documentation medium shall be clear.2. sinker bars and/or polished rods. 6. Cast bars shall not be used as raw material for manufacturing sucker rods. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. All rights reserved. design requirements. and acceptance criteria.3 Design Review Designs shall be reviewed and verified by a qualified person other than the person(s) who developed the original design to evaluate the ability of the design to meet requirements. reviews.2.3. 6.1 General The design shall conform to the requirements of this Standard. testing. in whole or in part. and retrievable. reproducible.2.1 General Materials used for the manufacture of products made in accordance with this Standard shall be as specified in the applicable Annexes. 6. pony rods. validation. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall include design verification. and as applicable: assumptions. legible.2.2 Design Requirements 6. 21 .3. and any necessary actions.4 Design Verification Design verification shall be performed to ensure that each product design meets the manufacturer’s technical specifications.2 Design Documentation Design documentation shall as a minimum include drawings. 6. All products shall be manufactured from new materials and shall conform to the materials specified in the applicable Annexes.2 Metals 6. 6.2.1 General The manufacturer shall have and conform to documented specifications for all materials used in products manufactured to this Standard. Copyright API.3.

Technologies for inspections with verifiable accuracies equal to or better than those listed in this Standard may be applied with appropriate documentation approved by a qualified person. Calibration intervals for inspecting.2. for each specific product are listed in the applicable annex. inspected. equipment used to measure. Calibration intervals shall be a maximum of three months until a recorded calibration history is established. elongation.1 General To maintain accuracy. yield strength. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. controlled. and this Standard. inspected. This shall be performed at specified intervals in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and the requirements of this Standard.2. and adjusted. controlled. calibrated. Inspection. b) for materials that will be used as received and not subsequently heat treated or cold worked: date of manufacture. if necessary.2 Quality Control 7. Intervals may be lengthened or shortened based on calibration history. measuring and testing equipment shall be established based on repeatability and degree of usage. These records shall be available to the end user upon request. measuring or testing equipment shall be immediately removed from service until calibration is verified. heat number. All rights reserved. and testing equipment shall be used only within the calibrated range. ultimate tensile strength. as applicable. 7 Manufacturer Requirements 7. MTRs shall be maintained by the manufacturer for a period of at least five years. each of the following topics shall be addressed by the manufacturer. and adjusted at specific intervals in accordance with documented procedures. and chemical composition. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.3 or equivalent national standard. Specific testing and inspecting criteria.1 General As a minimum.2. 6. and testing equipment used for acceptance shall be identified. heat number.2 Material Test Report (MTR) Material test reports provided by the steel mill or processor for materials used to manufacture products with traceability requirements shall include: a) for materials that will be subsequently heat treated or cold worked: date of manufacture. in whole or in part. In the event of suspected damage or misuse the inspecting. 7. test and gauge products manufactured in accordance with this Standard shall be identified. calibrated.3.3 Non-metallic Materials for FRP Sucker Rods The manufacturer shall develop specifications for non-metallic materials and shall define those characteristics critical to the performance of the material. Copyright API. measuring.3. chemical composition.2 Inspection/Measuring/Testing Equipment Calibration (Except for Thread Gauges) Inspection. and reduction in area. including dimensional inspecting and gauging. The calibration or verification of measuring and testing equipment used for product acceptance shall be traceable to the applicable national or specifications agency. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. hardness. See Annex M for calibration of measuring equipment. measuring. 7. A calibration interval cannot be increased by more than twice the previous interval. 6. Calibration shall conform to the requirements of ANSI NCSL Z540. 22 .

000 500 21 22 a 100% inspection (sort) of rejected parts is acceptable practice. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.000 80 7 8 10. pony rods.0% . 7. sinker bars and polished rods.000 315 21 22 >500.2 Frequency and Acceptance of Inspection 7.2.000 200 14 15 150. as specified in Table 1. Lot Size Sample Size Accept Lot Reject Lot a 2 to 8 2 0 1 9 to 15 2 0 1 16 to 25 3 0 1 26 to 50 5 0 1 51 to 90 5 0 1 91 to 150 8 1 2 151 to 280 13 1 2 281 to 500 20 2 3 501 to 1. Copyright API. specifications and final component dimensions.2. acceptable quality level (AQL) of 4.001 to 150. non-destructive examinations shall be performed and accepted according to the manufacturer’s documented specifications which include the acceptance criteria. Dimensional inspection shall be performed by a qualified person to assure proper function and conformance with design criteria.001 to 500. More stringent inspection plans are acceptable.001 to 35. When specified. This document is not an API Standard. Table 1 – Single Sampling Plans for Normal Inspection. Calibration standards used to calibrate inspecting.4. general inspection level I. shall be in accordance with the acceptance criteria for the single 1 sampling plan for normal inspection.3 Personnel Qualifications All personnel performing quality control activities directly affecting material and product quality shall be qualified in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented requirements.4. 1 Tables 1 and 2 are based upon ANSI/ASQ Z1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.201 to 10.4 Product Acceptance 7. General Inspection Level I. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. in whole or in part. measuring and testing equipment shall be checked and approved at a minimum of once a year by a national standards institute or an organization accredited by a signatory of the ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement. All rights reserved.2.1 Batch Lot Processing Unless otherwise stated in an Annex. AQL of 4% (1) (2) (3) (4) Number of Parts.000 125 10 11 35.1 General Products designed and manufactured in accordance with this Standard shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate Annexes of this Standard.201 to 3. 7.200 32 3 4 1. the frequency and acceptance of inspection of manufacturing lots for sucker rods. 7.200 50 5 6 3. Out of Specification.2.2. 23 . Records shall be maintained for a minimum of five years for all accepted finished products.4.4-2008 (R2013).2.

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
Unless otherwise stated in an Annex, the frequency and acceptance of inspection of manufacturing lots for couplings,
pumping tees, stuffing boxes, polished rod liners, and polished rod clamps shall be in accordance with the
acceptance criteria for the single sampling plan for normal inspection, general inspection level II, acceptable quality
level (AQL) of 10.0%, as specified in Table 2. More stringent inspection plans are acceptable.

Table 2 – Single Sampling Plans for Normal Inspection, General Inspection Level II, AQL of 10%

(1) (2) (3) (4)
Number of Parts, Out of Specification,
Lot Size Sample Size Accept Lot Reject Lot a
2 to 8 2 1 2
9 to 15 3 1 2
16 to 25 5 1 2
26 to 50 8 2 3
51 to 90 13 3 4
91 to 150 20 5 6
151 to 280 32 7 8
281 to 500 50 10 11
501 to 1,200 80 14 15
1,201 to 3,200 125 21 22
3,201 to 10,000 200 21 22
10,001 to 35,000 315 21 22
35,001 to 150,000 500 21 22
150,001 to 500,000 800 21 22
>500,000 1250 21 22
a 100% inspection (sort) of rejected parts is acceptable practice.

Products shall be dimensionally inspected for conformance to the manufacturer’s drawing and written specifications.
The frequency of dimensional inspections for batch lot processing shall be accomplished according to the random
sampling plans shown in Table 1 for sucker rods, pony rods, sinker bars, and polished rods, or Table 2 for couplings,
sub-couplings, pumping tees, stuffing boxes, polished rod liners, and polished rod clamps.

Acceptance criteria also may be based on continuous monitoring and statistical process control such as described in
ANSI/ASQ Z1.4-2008 (R2013).

7.2.4.2.2 Continuous Processing

For continuous processing, a minimum of AQL 10% (Table 2) of the produced parts shall be inspected. Processing of
non-conforming items shall conform to 7.2.5. Parts manufactured prior to the non-conforming items shall be
inspected back to the last acceptable part and the non-conforming parts shall be dispositioned according to the
manufacturer’s documented procedures. Acceptance criteria may be based on continuous monitoring and statistical
process control such as described in ANSI/ASQ Z1.4-2008 (R2013).

7.2.4.3 Threads

All connections shall conform to the gauging practices of this Standard. Manufacturers that produce pumping tees
and/or stuffing boxes shall conform to the additional requirements of API 5B, as these products require reference
master gauges.

7.2.5 Manufacturing Non-conformances

24

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
The manufacturer shall establish and maintain documented procedures to ensure that product which does not
conform to specified requirements is prevented from unintended use or installation. This control shall provide for
identification, evaluation, segregation, and disposition of non-conforming assemblies or components.

The responsibility for review and authority for the disposition of non-conforming product shall be defined by the
manufacturer. Non-conforming product shall be:

a) reworked to meet the specified requirements or the specified requirements of another product;

b) accepted without repair by concession of a manufacturer’s qualified and authorized person, provided the
concession is within the design acceptance criteria and at no time is this product allowed to violate the
requirements of this Standard; or

c) rejected or scrapped.

Records of the nature of nonconformities and any subsequent actions taken, including concessions obtained, shall be
maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s documented procedures. These records shall be retained for a
minimum of five years.

7.2.6 Coatings

Coatings shall be controlled by documented processing instructions, which have been approved by a qualified
person. These instructions shall include acceptance criteria.

7.2.7 Heat Treating Furnace Instrumentation

Automatic controlling and recording instruments shall be used. Thermocouples shall be located in the furnace
working zone(s). The controlling and recording instruments used for the heat treatment processes shall possess
accuracy to within ±1% of their full-scale range. Temperature controlling and recording instruments shall be
calibrated at least once every six months until a documented calibration history can be established. Calibration
intervals shall then be established based on repeatability, degree of usage and documented calibration history.
Equipment used to calibrate the furnace equipment shall possess accuracy to within ±0.25% of full-scale range.

7.2.8 Non-destructive Examination (NDE)

When NDE is utilized, instructions shall be detailed in the manufacturer’s documented procedures and conform to the
requirements of this Standard. All NDE instructions shall be approved by a Level III examiner qualified in accordance
with an international or national standard such as ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A or ISO 9712.

Personnel performing NDE shall be qualified to at least Level II for evaluation and interpretation in accordance with
an international or national standard such as ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A or ISO 9712. Any
unacceptable indications shall be removed, repaired, and re-examined using the original NDE method.

In case discontinuities are detected by non-visual NDE methods, the evaluation may be supplemented by visual
examination and measurement to determine the size of the discontinuity at the option of the manufacturer.

7.2.9 Traceability

All products manufactured under this Standard shall be traceable as required by the applicable Annex. Traceability
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented procedures. Traceability is considered sufficient if the
product meets the traceability requirements of this Standard when it leaves the manufacturer’s inventory.

7.3 Product Identification

25

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
All products manufactured under this Standard shall be marked in accordance with the requirements detailed in the
appropriate normative Annex and the manufacturer’s documented procedures.

7.4 Documentation

The manufacturer shall establish and maintain documented procedures to control documents and data required by
this Standard. These documents and data shall be clear, legible, reproducible, and retrievable. These documents
and data shall be retained in facilities that provide an environment which prevents damage, deterioration, or loss.
Documents and data may be in the form of any type of medium, such as hard copy or electronic media, and shall be
retained for a minimum of five years from the date of manufacture.

7.5 Special Processes Requiring Validation

Heat treatment, spray metal coating, and nondestructive examination (NDE) are special processes requiring
validation for products covered by this Standard.

26

org/compositelist). N. this annex establishes the requirements for those organizations who wish to voluntarily obtain an API license to provide API monogrammed products that satisfy the requirements of the applicable API product specification(s) and/or standard(s) and API Monogram Program requirements.. API maintains a complete. in whole or in part.api. searchable list of all Monogram licensees on the API Composite List website (www.1 Applicability This annex is normative (mandatory) for products supplied bearing the API Monogram and manufactured at a facility licensed by API.org. For information on becoming an API Monogram Licensee.1. API Monogram program licenses are issued only after an on-site audit has verified that an organization has implemented and continually maintained a quality management system that meets the requirements of API Q1 and that the resulting products satisfy the requirements of the applicable API product specification(s) and/or standard(s). It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.1 Scope A. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. All rights reserved. for all other instances it is not applicable. Together with the requirements of the API Monogram license agreement. A. A.2 General ® The API Monogram is a registered certification mark owned by the American Petroleum Institute (API) and authorized for licensing by the API Board of Directors. 1220 L Street. W. Through the API Monogram Program. Certification Programs. as of the date indicated. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. The application of the API Monogram and license number on products constitutes a representation and warranty by the licensee to API and to purchasers of the products that. Annex A (informative) API Monogram Program Use of the API Monogram by Licensees A. please contact API. This document is not an API Standard.2 Normative References In addition to the referenced standards listed earlier in this document. Washington. DC 20005 or call 202-682-8145 or by email at certification@api. only manufacturers with a license from API can apply the API Monogram to their products.1. this annex references the following standard: 27 . Copyright API. Although any manufacturer may claim that its products meet API product requirements without monogramming them. the products were manufactured under a quality management system conforming to the requirements of API Q1 and that the product conforms in every detail with the applicable standard(s) or product specification(s). API licenses product manufacturers to apply the API Monogram to products which comply with product specifications and have been manufactured under a quality management system that meets the requirements of API Q1.

3. the latest version of this document shall be used. conformance with the following shall be required at all times: a) the quality management system requirements of API Q1. d) the API Monogram and license number.3. and 6) define the application of all other required API product specification(s) and/or standard(s) marking requirements. b) the API Monogram Program requirements of API Q1. API Specification Q1. 2) define the method(s) used to apply the Monogram and license number. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Annex A.1 Monogram Program Requirements For all organizations desiring to acquire and maintain a license to use the API Monogram. at a minimum. be two digits representing the month and two digits representing the year (e.2 Control of the Application and Removal of the API Monogram Each licensee shall control the application and removal of the API Monogram in accordance with the following: a) products that do not conform to API specified requirements shall not bear the API Monogram. 05-12 for May 2012) unless otherwise stipulated in the applicable API product specification(s) or standard(s). All rights reserved. when issued. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.3 API Monogram Program: Licensee Responsibilities A. and d) the requirements contained in the API Monogram Program License Agreement. c) the requirements contained in the API product specification(s) to which the organization is licensed. and e) the API Monogram may be applied at any time appropriate during the production process but shall be removed in accordance with the licensee’s API Monogram marking procedure if the product is subsequently found to be 28 . b) each licensee shall develop and maintain an API Monogram marking procedure that documents the marking/monogramming requirements specified by this annex and any applicable API product specification(s) and/or standard(s).g. are site-specific and subsequently the API Monogram shall only be applied at that site specific licensed facility location. 5) require that the date of manufacture. 4) require the application of the date of manufacture of the product in conjunction with the use of the API Monogram and license number. c) only an API licensee shall apply the API Monogram and its designated license number to API monogrammable products. This document is not an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. A. The marking procedure shall: 1) define the authority responsible for application and removal of the API Monogram and license number. Specification for Quality Management System Requirements for Manufacturing Organizations for the Petroleum and Natural Gas Industry For Licensees under the Monogram Program. A. The requirements identified therein are mandatory. 3) identify the location on the product where the API Monogram and license number are to be applied. Copyright API. in whole or in part.

The design document information shall provide objective evidence that the product design meets the requirements of the applicable and most current API product specification(s) and/or standard(s). Copyright API. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.5 Use of the API Monogram in Advertising An API Monogram licensee shall not use the API Monogram and/or license number on letterheads.g.4. as applicable (e. Requirements for alternative API Monogram marking are detailed in the. A. as a minimum. “API [Document Number]” (e. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2 Product Specification Identification Manufacturers shall mark products as specified by the applicable API specifications or standards.4 Manufacturing Capability The API Monogram Program is designed to identify facilities that have demonstrated the ability to manufacture equipment that conforms to API specifications and/or standards. The Licensee should contact API for guidance on the use of the API Monogram other than on products. API Monogram Program Alternative Marking of Products License Agreement.. API 6A.org/advisories. For certain manufacturing processes or types of products. buildings or other structures. API may perform additional audits (at the organization’s expense) of any subcontractors to ensure their conformance with the requirements of the applicable API product specification(s) and/or standard(s).g. 29 . available on the API Monogram Program website at http://www. A. API Spec 6A or API Std 600). reference to the API specifications and/or standards shall be.api. The design documentation shall be made available during API audits of the facility. when space allows. out of conformance with any of the requirements of the applicable API product specification(s) and/or standard(s) and API Monogram Program. API may refuse initial licensing or suspend current licensing based on a facility’s level of manufacturing capability.3.4. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard. Unless otherwise specified. the marking may include use of “Spec” or “Std”. A. as detailed in Advisory # 6. All rights reserved. available on API Monogram Program website at http://www. A.4 Product Marking Requirements A.. the exclusion of design activities is allowed under the Monogram Program.3. alternative API Monogram marking procedures may be acceptable.1 General These marking requirements shall apply only to those API Licensees wishing to mark applicable products in conjunction with the requirements of the API Monogram Program. In specific instances. If API determines that an additional review is warranted.3 Design and Design Documentation Each licensee and/or applicant for licensing shall maintain current design documentation as identified in API Q1 for all of the applicable products that fall under the scope of each Monogram license. websites or in any advertising without an express statement of fact describing the scope of Licensee’s authorization (license number and product specification). or API 600).api. A. Unless otherwise specified.3. Marking shall include reference to the applicable API specification and/or standard.org/alternative-marking. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.

30 . Nameplate shall be located as specified by the API specification and/or standard. If not specified. then the licensee shall develop and maintain a procedure detailing the location to which the nameplate shall be applied. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.5 License Number The API Monogram license number shall not be used unless it is marked in conjunction with the API Monogram. This document is not an API Standard.5 API Monogram Program: Nonconformance Reporting API solicits information on products that are found to be nonconforming with API specified requirements.3 Units Products shall be marked with units as specified in the API specification and/or standard. A. Customers are requested to report to API all problems with API monogrammed products. The API Monogram and license number shall be marked on the nameplate. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.aspx. in whole or in part. in addition to the other product marking requirements specified by the applicable product specification and/or standard. Use of dual units [USC units and metric (SI) units] may be acceptable.4 Nameplates Nameplates.4.4. Copyright API. if such units are allowed by the applicable product specification and/or standard. shall be made of a corrosion-resistant material unless otherwise specified by the API specification and/or standard. A. equipment shall be marked with U. customary (USC) units. A nonconformance may be reported using the API Nonconformance Reporting System available at http://compositelist.4. A.S. A. If the location is not specified. as well as field failures (or malfunctions). it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved. Nameplates may be attached at any time during the manufacturing process.api.org/ncr. The license number shall be used in close proximity to the API Monogram. which are judged to be caused by either specification and/or standard deficiencies or nonconformities against API specified requirements. when applicable.

These consist of: 1) Sucker rod threads.2 Thread Types There are two thread types used for manufacturing products in Annex C through G.1 General The threaded portions of steel sucker rods and pony rods (Annex C). This document is not an API Standard. Sucker rod box threads (TSRB) shall be furnished on sucker rod couplings (Annex G). Annex B (normative) Thread Form Requirements B. bolts) for polished rod clamps (Annex L) and shall define those characteristics critical to the performance of the assembled product.g. and on the upset pin-end of polished rods (Annex F). sinker bars (Annex E). FRP sucker rods and pony rods (Annex D). it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All thread types for products in Annex C through G shall be manufactured by thread rolling or thread forming and all threading shall occur after final heat treatment and/or spray metal coating.. pin and box. if applicable. and sucker rod couplings. polished rod couplings and sub-couplings (Annex G) shall conform to the thread form requirements in this Annex. fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) sucker rods and pony rods (Annex D). and 2) Polished rod threads. The threaded portions of pumping tees (Annex I) and lower stuffing box bodies (Annex J) shall conform to the thread form requirements in API 5B and 5B1. polished rod couplings and sub-couplings (Annex G) can be used with sucker rod pin threads (TSRP). It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. if applicable. in whole or in part. All rights reserved. The manufacturer shall develop documented specifications for all other threaded components. sinker bars (Annex E). The manufacturer shall develop documented specifications for all threaded components for polished rod liners (Annex K).2. polished rods (Annex F). pin and box. Pin and Box Sucker rod pin threads (TSRP) shall be furnished on steel sucker rods and pony rods (Annex C). The manufacturer shall develop documented specifications for all threaded components (e. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 Sucker Rod Threads. 31 . B. Sucker rod couplings. and shall define those characteristics critical to the performance of the assembled product. Copyright API. B. and shall define those characteristics critical to the performance of the assembled product.

1: Sucker rod couplings shall not be used with polished rod pin threads. B. All rights reserved.3.2. Note B.1. (See Table B. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. The thread minor diameter on the sucker rod coupling interferes with the minor diameter of the 9° pin cone preventing proper makeup and may result in failure of the sucker rod coupling or polished rod pin.1 General Sucker rod and polished rod threads are straight threads (see Figure B. Polished rod box threads (TPRB) shall be furnished on polished rod couplings and sub-couplings (Annex E).1 for values). 32 . Pin and Box Polished rod pin threads (TPRP) shall be furnished on the non-upset end(s) of polished rods (Annex F) and available as an option on sinker bars (Annex E). The specific dimensional requirements and the required gauging (Annex H) shall be based on the actual dimensional requirements in this Standard. in whole or in part. as defined in ANSI/ASME B1.3 Thread Form Requirements B. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. B.1). The threaded portion shall be ten threads per inch and are based on the unified thread form with Class 2A-2B tolerances and allowances. Polished rod couplings or sub-couplings (Annex G) can be used with polished rod pin threads (TPRP) or sucker rod pin threads (TSRP). It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2 Polished Rod Threads.

1. This document is not an API Standard. The design profile of the TSRP is special type UNR thread with a rounded root contour as shown in Figure B. Copyright API.2 and the nominal thread sizes (SNT) in Table B. 33 .1.1 – Thread Form Illustration B. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. in whole or in part. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Figure B.2 Sucker Rod Pin Threads Sucker rod pin threads (TSRP) shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure B. All rights reserved.3.

pin major Minimum 0.18 0.29 1.031 0.28 diameter.594 15. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. pin shoulder Minimum 1.9962 25.55 2.94 0.18 0.19 0.141 3. mm DP1 b.79 0.63 2.8712 22. e The radius or chamfer shall not be sharp.18 0.321 1.875 22.146 1.1211 28.409 35.938 49. b See Figure B.505 38.18 0.920 23.125 3.75 1.1150 28.799 1.313 33.785 19.232 31.98 LSR d Maximum 0.141 3.2508 31.222 31.703 17.452 1.031 0.795 20.906 23. in whole or in part.9384 23.90 0.255 57.998 diameter.828 21.779 1.125 3.303 1. Shape is optional with the manufacturer.37 1.141 3.59 0. c It is recommended not to use the maximum dimension of the pin major diameter (DP1) in order to avoid interference with the coupling and reduce the possibility of thread galling.11 1.770 1.5480 39. mm in.4382 36. stress relief Minimum 0. c Maximum 0.875 47.58 0.125 3.910 23.1 – Dimensions for Sucker Rod Pins with Sucker Rod Pin Threads (TSRP) Nominal Thread Size (SNT) 5/8 TSRP 3/4 TSRP 7/8 TSRP 1 TSRP 1 1/8 TSRP Dimensional Element a in.125 3. mm in.58 0.063 1.835 1.438 36.125 3.240 56.255 31. d The length of the stress relief (LSR) is measured before threading.647 diameter. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.516 13. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. sucker rod pin Minimum 1.40 2.625 41.09 0.236 1.1861 30.02 length.54 1.18 length.18 0.0634 27.3735 34. mm in.18 0.23 1.005 50.4892 37.240 31.887 1.29 1.9233 23.86 1.62 1.125 53.141 3.045 26.85 1.8654 21.0482 26. This document is not an API Standard.672 17.34 1.125 3. Copyright API. pin shoulder LSP Maximum 1.688 42.04 1.88 0.476 1.063 1.141 3.952 1. All rights reserved.02 1.031 0.24 0.18 0.28 1.981 0. pin pitch Minimum 0.0611 26.04 diameter.51 1.547 13.250 31.127 1.86 0.79 LPS Minimum 0.500 38.990 50. stress relief Minimum 0.125 3.58 0. pin minor DPP b Maximum 0.56 length.125 3.10 1. mm in.625 15.797 20. stress relief Minimum 0.071 1.419 36.90 DSR Maximum 0.18 0.8135 20.010 1.58 radius.2 – Sucker Rod Pin with Sucker Rod Pin Thread (TSRP) Illustration Table B.88 1.319 DP2 b Maximum 0.620 41.23 RPSe Maximum 0.9900 25.79 0.188 55.93 2.5609 39. pin shoulder RSR Maximum 0.21 2. Shape optional with manufacturer Figure B.1732 29.530 diameter.3020 33.4960 37.035 26.630 41.826 DPS Maximum 1.128 0.18 a See Figure B.1. 34 .559 1.624 1.79 0.3085 33.59 radius or chamfer.663 0.04 0.490 37.9362 23.125 3.069 0.125 3.2.58 0.11 0.3606 34.

5630 39.235 31.985 50.97 1.220 56.517 38.8730 22. total depth of box LBT d Minimum 1.66 2.42 2.85 length.64 1.3754 34.000 50.86 1.11 0.0630 27.438 11.205 30.3.750 69.61 1.547 39.3 and the nominal thread sizes (SNT) in Table B.72 1.11 0.70 0.0060 25.54 1.500 63.727 1.25 p) flat width to allow for crest wear as shown in Figure B.410 35.96 DBC Maximum 0.580 40.39 DF2 Maximum 1.455 36. Table B.267 32.215 30.205 30.000 1. box thread major DB2 b Maximum 0.500 12.367 1.476 37.090 27.80 2.15 length.11 0.955 49. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1. Figure B.26 1.43 1.235 31.250 57.79 1.39 diameter.552 1.938 49.438 11.38 1.438 11. perfect box thread a See Figure B.61 1.101 27.500 12.1.600 40.70 0.28 LBC Maximum 0. mm in.080 27.580 40.734 44.273 diameter.3. mm in.080 27.1880 30.500 12.50 2.360 34.3 – Sucker Rod Coupling with Sucker Rod Box Thread (TSRB) Illustration Table B.51 1.37 1. All rights reserved.11 LBD c Minimum 1.955 24.64 diameter.3105 33.43 1.08 0. box counterbore Minimum 0.3 Sucker Rod Box Threads Sucker rod box threads (TSRB) shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure B.13 1.25 x pitch (0.288 32. Copyright API.524 1. in whole or in part.049 DF1 Maximum 1.9980 25.78 1.503 1.62 0.393 35.64 1.500 12. mm ATC Maximum 30° 30’ 30° 30’ 30° 30’ 30° 30’ 30° 30’ angle.69 1.438 11.750 44.18 1.110 28.8806 22.610 40.53 1.2 – Dimensions for Sucker Rod Couplings with Sucker Rod Box Threads (TSRB) Nominal Thread Size (SNT) 5/8 TSRB 3/4 TSRB 7/8 TSRB 1 TSRB 1 1/8 TSRB Dimensional Element a in.98 2.230 56.70 0. The design profile of the TSRB is a special type UN thread having a flat root contour with a permissible round root contour beyond the 0.61 1.830 21.935 1.1.26 1.4980 38. b See Figure B. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.790 45.96 1.1310 28.125 53.976 24.5068 38.485 37. contact face major Minimum 1.29 1.205 30.175 1. mm in.500 12. B.174 0.403 35. mm in.704 43.19 1.080 27.438 11. box thread pitch Minimum 0. box counterbore Minimum 0. 35 . This document is not an API Standard.49 Diameter.590 40.965 24. The hollow thread-crest from thread forming shall not be considered to be detrimental.89 1. contact face minor Minimum 1.1230 28. thread chamfer Minimum 29° 30’ 29° 30’ 29° 30’ 29° 30’ 29° 30’ DB1 b Minimum 0.3190 33.23 2.70 length.04 diameter.9380 23.851 21.11 0. box thread minor Minimum 0.47 2.955 24.43 1.45 1.700 diameter.37 1.81 1.825 1.3.455 36.349 1.70 0.13 DBP b Maximum 0.72 1.287 1.330 33.

d Length of perfect box thread (LBT) includes counterbore. This document is not an API Standard. B. for the interface between two different size threads.4 Polished Rod Pin Threads Polished rod pin threads (TPRP) shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure B. In all cases. the length of the total depth of box (L BD) can only be achieved with a single bore through the coupling. the length of the threaded bore of the smaller size shall at a minimum be LBT and tapped fully to depth to insure perfect thread form. in whole or in part.4 and the nominal thread sizes (SNT) in Table B. Figure B. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Copyright API. All rights reserved. For sub-couplings to achieve LBD. The 9° taper is formed from the root of the thread and terminates at the pin shank.3.4. eliminating the need for the LBD dimension.4. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. c For all sucker rod and polished rod couplings. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.4 – Polished Rod Pin with Polished Rod Pin Thread (TPRP) Illustration 36 . The 9° taper of the polished rod pin may not maintain the same height as the straight threaded portion. the smaller thread bore must meet the length of the perfect box thread (LBT) dimension and possibly require a truncated tap for the larger thread bore to insure the requirements of LBT are met. The design profile of the TPRP is a special type UNR thread with a rounded root contour as shown in Figure B.1 with imperfect pin threads on the 9° taper as shown in Figure B.

9233 23. Shank.1.08 0.8712 22.094 2.051 1.225 5.051 1.0482 26.8654 21.887 1.575 14.72 0.779 1.609 40.200 5.9233 23. Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Minimum 0.347 8.4960 37. mm in. e The P2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge measures correct thread form of the perfect thread and standoff only. 37 . pin major Minimum 0.5609 39.825 20. mm in.08 LPP Maximum 1.450 36.984 50.094 2. 9° pin cone Minimum 9° 9° 9° 9° 9° DCB Theoretical 0.00 0.81 0.81 0.39 2. to pin and box cone base Minimum 0.74 length.981 0.3735 34.311 33.8135 20. pin minor DPP b Maximum 0. it can measure for perpendicularity only when the gauge is flush with the face of the pin shank. perfect thread Minimum 0.96 1.87 1.31 1.5480 39.835 1.302 1.200 5.3606 34.452 1.77 0.010 1.347 8.236 1.5680 39.0680 27.3 – Dimensions for Polished Rod Pins with Polished Rod Pin Threads (TPRP) Nominal Thread Size (SNT) 5/8 TPRP 3/4 TPRP 7/8 TPRP 1 TPRP 1 1/8 TPRP Dimensional Element a in.559 1. pin pitch Minimum 0.146 1.094 2.81 0.127 1.200 5.200 5.9362 23.234 56.61 0. All rights reserved.0611 26. Pin-cone Ring Gauge Minimum 0.00 SP4 Maximum 0.561 39.08 a Reference Figure B.065 1.72 length.9362 23.98 2.08 0.08 0.476 1.127 1.225 5.4892 37.3735 34. d It is not required that the perfect thread length (LPT) dimension be measured separately.771 44.00 0.218 5.140 28.359 34.3805 35.4382 36.81 0.38 0. c It is recommended not to use the maximum dimension of the pin major diameter (DP1) in order to avoid interference with the coupling and reduce the possibility of thread galling. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.78 0.72 0.530 diameter.1930 30.48 1. LSH + LPT + LTC Minimum 1.32 0.799 1.390 35. This document is not an API Standard.218 5.225 5.69 LTC Maximum 0.78 0.225 5.08 0.200 5.52 1.0482 26.1861 30.200 5. Copyright API.224 5.0634 27.225 5.1211 28.30 0. to 9° angle Minimum 0.390 35.200 5. Table B.72 0.000 0. pin shank SP2 e Maximum 0.200 5.225 5.021 51.77 1.42 0.127 1.87 1.051 1.200 5.65 length.288 7.54 0.72 0.96 1.3606 34.624 1.225 5. mm in. mm in.288 7. pin and box cone base DP1 b.071 1.0611 26.686 17.72 Standoff.770 1.72 0.33 LPT d Maximum 0.128 0.000 0.32 0.5609 39.000 0.609 40.30 0.347 8. to 9° pin cone Minimum 0.779 1.559 1.38 0.000 0.200 5.30 0.094 2.32 0.72 0.9900 25.30 0.799 1.54 0.32 length.69 0.663 0.1150 28. c Maximum 0.288 7.2508 31.200 30.30 Standoff. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.319 DP2 b Maximum 0.1861 30.319 LCB Maximum 0.08 0.452 1.96 0.83 LSH Maximum 0.321 1.936 23.54 0.5480 39.385 9. mm APC Maximum 9° 30’ 9° 30’ 9° 30’ 9° 30’ 9° 30’ angle.3085 33.347 8.1732 29.38 radius.225 5.9430 23.952 1.936 23.094 2. in whole or in part.3020 33.225 5.887 1.32 0. pin shank Minimum 0.00 0.38 0.08 0.9962 25.385 9.000 0.30 1.31 1.218 5.288 7.38 0.1732 29.998 diameter.952 1.78 length.051 1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.225 5.08 0.78 0.78 0.624 1.08 0.825 20.4.051 1.81 RSH Maximum 0.827 diameter.224 5.00 0.647 diameter.288 7.385 9.9384 23.72 0. b See Figure B.647 diameter.72 0.385 9.347 8.303 1.952 1.385 9.826 DSH Maximum 0.

175 1.9380 23.1880 30.580 40.3754 34. All rights reserved.43 1. The hollow thread-crest from thread forming shall not be considered to be detrimental.3.935 1.503 1.552 1.000 1.287 1. Figure B.082 0. box thread major DB2 b Maximum 0.790 1.524 1. mm in.4550 36.8730 22.4 – Dimensions for Polished Rod Couplings or Sub-Couplings with Polished Rod Box Threads (TPRB) Nominal Thread Size (SNT) 5/8 TPRB 3/4 TPRB 7/8 TPRB 1 TPRB 1 1/8 TPRB Dimensional Element a in.490 diameter.3190 33.5.3805 35.205 30. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. thread chamfer Minimum 8° 30’ 8° 30’ 8° 30’ 8° 30’ 8° 30’ DB1 b Minimum 0.69 1.700 diameter.403 35. Copyright API.26 1.25 p) flat width to allow for crest wear as shown in Figure B. box thread pitch Minimum 0.349 1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. box thread minor Minimum 0.393 35.51 1.8806 22.3105 33.174 0.64 1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. mm in.8300 21.13 1. The counterbore depth and start of the threads are the only difference between TPRB and sucker rod box threads (TSRB).25 x pitch (0.1010 27.83 38 . B. mm in.2670 32.1310 28.090 27.965 1.5 and the nominal thread sizes (SNT) in Table B.068 27. The design profile of the TPRB is a special type UN thread having a flat root contour with permissible round root contour beyond the 0.182 1.5630 39.5 – Polished Rod Coupling or Sub-coupling with Polished Rod Box Thread (TPRB) Illustration Table B.0630 27.39 diameter.38 1.4980 38.215 30.727 1.965 24.568 39.13 DBP b Maximum 0.049 DCB Theoretical 0.5). mm in.080 27.4760 37.0800 27.9760 24. in whole or in part.432 1.9550 24.06 1.86 1.30 1.715 1.8510 21.5068 38.615 0.9980 25.257 1. This document is not an API Standard.957 DBC Maximum 0.1. box counterbore Minimum 0.273 diameter.193 30.95 1.2880 32.61 1.590 40.367 1. mm ATC Maximum 9° 9° 9° 9° 9° angle.1230 28.943 23.825 1. TPRB have a shorter counterbore with the imperfect pin threads on the 9° vanishing cone as the starting thread (see Figure B.5 Polished Rod Box Threads Polished rod box threads (TPRB) shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure B.0060 25.955 24.

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
diameter, pin and box cone base
DF1 Maximum 1.235 31.37 1.485 37.72 1.610 40.89 1.985 50.42 2.230 56.64
diameter, contact face major Minimum 1.205 30.61 1.455 36.96 1.580 40.13 1.955 49.66 2.220 56.39
DF2 Maximum 1.110 28.19 1.235 31.37 1.360 34.54 1.547 39.29 1.734 44.04
diameter, contact face minor Minimum 1.080 27.43 1.205 30.61 1.330 33.78 1.517 38.53 1.704 43.28
LBC Maximum 0.300 7.62 0.300 7.62 0.300 7.62 0.300 7.62 0.300 7.62
length, box counterbore Minimum 0.250 6.35 0.250 6.35 0.250 6.35 0.250 6.35 0.250 6.35
LBD c
Minimum 1.750 44.45 1.938 49.23 2.125 53.98 2.500 63.50 2.750 69.85
length, total depth of box
LBT d
Minimum 1.410 35.81 1.600 40.64 1.790 45.47 2.000 50.80 2.250 57.15
length, perfect box thread
LCB Maximum 0.200 5.08 0.200 5.08 0.200 5.08 0.200 5.08 0.200 5.08
length, to pin and box cone base Minimum 0.175 4.45 0.175 4.45 0.175 4.45 0.175 4.45 0.175 4.45
a See Figure B.5.
b See Figure B.1, Table B.1.
c For all sucker rod and polished rod couplings, the length of the total depth of box (L BD) can only be achieved with a single bore through the coupling. For sub-couplings to
achieve LBD, the smaller thread bore must meet the length of the perfect box thread (LBT) dimension and possibly require a truncated tap for the larger thread bore to insure the
requirements of LBT are met. In all cases, for the interface between two different size threads, the length of the threaded bore of the smaller size shall at a minimum be LBT and
tapped fully to depth to insure perfect thread form.
d Length of perfect box thread (LBT) includes counterbore.

B.4 Dimensional Inspection Requirements

B.4.1 General

Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented
procedures. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined
below.

B.4.2 Inspection Racks and/or Tables

Support racks and/or tables for the inspection of all pin ends, couplings and sub-couplings shall, as a minimum, be of
a material that is non-damaging to the product. Dimensional requirements for the inspection racks and tables are
provided in the product Annexes.

B.4.3 Dimensional Inspection

Dimensional inspection of all thread types listed in B.2 shall be performed in accordance with Table B.6. If a non-
conformance is found, the product shall be dispositioned in in accordance with 7.2.5.

Table B.6 – Dimensional Inspection
Check For Gauge or Measuring Instrument a Procedure

APC Angle Gauge or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum angle for APC or set the gauge to assure
angle, 9° pin cone APC is within the maximum angle. APC shall not be greater than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum angle for APC or set the gauge to assure
APC is within the minimum angle. APC shall not be less than the minimum.
ATC Angle Gauge or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum angle for ATC or set the gauge to assure
angle, thread chamfer ATC is within the maximum angle. ATC shall not be greater than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
39

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.

Minimum: measure to the minimum angle for ATC or set the gauge to assure
ATC is within the minimum angle. ATC shall not be less than the minimum.
DB1 Micrometer or Caliper Maximum: measure to the maximum major diameter for DB1. DB1 shall not be
diameter, box major larger than the maximum.
minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum major diameter for DB1. DB1 shall not be
smaller than the minimum
DB2 Caliper or Plug Gage Maximum: measure to the maximum minor diameter for DB2. DB2 shall not be
diameter, box minor larger than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum minor diameter for DB2. DB2 shall not be
smaller than the minimum
DBC Micrometer, Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DBC or set the gap gauge to
diameter, box counterbore assure DBC is within the maximum diameter. DBC shall not be larger than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DBC or set the gap gauge to
assure DBC is within the minimum diameter. DBC shall not be smaller than the
minimum.
DF1 Micrometer or Caliper Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DF1. DF1 shall not be larger
diameter, face major, than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DF1. DF1 shall not be smaller
than the minimum.
DF2 Micrometer or Caliper Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DF2. DF2 shall not be larger
diameter, face minor than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DF2. DF2 shall not be smaller
than the minimum diameter.
DPS Micrometer, Caliper, or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DPS or set the gap gauge to
diameter, pin shoulder, assure DPS is within the maximum diameter. DPS shall not be larger than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DPS or set the gap gauge to
assure DPS is within the minimum diameter. DPS shall not be smaller than the
minimum.
DSH Micrometer, Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DSH or set the gap gauge to
diameter, pin shank assure DSH is within the maximum diameter. DSH shall not be larger than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DSH or set the gap gauge to
assure DSH is within the minimum diameter. DSH shall not be smaller than the
minimum.
DSR Micrometer, Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DSR or set the gap gauge to
diameter, stress relief assure DSR is within the maximum diameter. DSR shall not be larger than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DSR or set the gap gauge to
assure DSR is within the minimum diameter. DSR shall not be smaller than the
minimum.
DP1 P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge and Maximum: the product threads shall enter the P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge to
diameter, pin major P6 No-go Pin thread Ring Gauge pin shoulder.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: the product threads shall not enter the P6 No-go Pin thread Ring
Gauge more than the third full turn of assembly.
DP2 P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge and Maximum: the product threads shall enter the P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge to
diameter, pin minor P6 No-go Pin thread Ring Gauge pin shoulder.
maximum
LBC Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LBC or set the gap gauge to

40

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
length, box counterbore assure LBC is within the maximum. LBC shall not be longer than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LBC or set the gap gauge to
assure LBC is within the minimum length. LBC shall not be shorter than the
minimum.
LBD b B2 Go Box thread Plug Gauge Minimum: the B2 Go Box thread Plug Gauge shall enter the product box threads
length, total depth of box to contact face. LBD shall not be shorter than the minimum.
minimum
LBT c B2 Go Box thread Plug Gauge Minimum: the B2 Go Box thread Plug Gauge shall enter the product box threads
length, perfect box thread to contact face. LBT shall not be shorter than the minimum.
minimum
LCB Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LCB or set the gap gauge to
length, to pin-and-box cone base assure LCB is within the maximum length. LCB shall not be longer than the
maximum and minimum maximum length.

Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LCB or set the gap gauge to
assure LCB is within the minimum length. LCB shall not be shorter than the
minimum.
LPP Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LPP or set the gap gauge to
length, calculated from LSH + LPT + LTC assure LPP is within the maximum length. LPP shall not be longer than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LPP or set the gap gauge to
assure LPP is within the minimum length. LPP shall not be shorter than the
minimum.
LPS Caliper or Gap Gauge Minimum: measure to the maximum length for LPS or set the gap gauge to
length, pin shoulder assure LPS is within the minimum length. LPS shall not be shorter than the
minimum minimum.
LSP Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LSP or set the gap gauge to
length, sucker rod pin assure LSP is within the maximum length. LSP shall not be longer than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LSP or set the gap gauge to
assure LSP is within the minimum length. LSP shall not be shorter than the
minimum.
LSR d Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length LSR or set the gap gauge to assure
length, stress relief LSR is within the maximum length. LSR shall not be longer than the maximum.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum length LSR or set the gap gauge to assure
LSR is with the minimum length. LSR shall not be shorter than the minimum.
LTC Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LTC or set the gap gauge to
length, to 9° pin cone assure LTC is within the maximum length. LTC shall not be longer than the
maximum and minimum maximum.

Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LTC or set the gap gauge to
assure LTC is with the minimum length. LTC shall not be shorter than the
minimum.
PBS B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge and Maximum: the B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge shall enter the product box
parallelism, box contact face 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) Flat Feeler Gauge threads to the box contact face. The feeler gauge shall not enter, at any point,
maximum between the face of the gauge and the product contact face.
PPS P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge and Maximum: the product pin shall enter the P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge to pin
parallelism, pin shoulder 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) Flat Feeler Gauge shoulder. The 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) Flat Feeler Gauge shall not enter, at any
maximum point, between the face of the P8 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge and the product pin
shoulder.
a Anvils on measuring instruments shall not be less than 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) and not greater than 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) wide.
b For all sucker rod and polished rod couplings, the length of the total depth of box (LTB) can only be achieved with a single bore through the coupling. For sub-couplings to

achieve LTB, the smaller thread bore must meet the length of the perfect box thread (LBT) dimension and possibly require a truncated tap for the larger thread bore to insure the
requirements of LBT are met. In all cases, for the interface between two different size threads, the length of the threaded bore of the smaller size shall at a minimum be LBT and
tapped fully to depth to insure perfect thread form.

41

The hollow thread-crest from thread forming shall not be considered to be detrimental.59 mm/m) on the mandrel thread is recommended. shears. Copyright API. c The length of perfect box thread (LBT) includes the length of box counterbore (LBC)./ft (1.51 mm).18 μm) Ra.4. holes or seams.4 Thread Alignment Maximum parallel misalignment of axes of coupling or sub-coupling threads shall not exceed 0. (3. Angular B.81 m)].5.1 Thread Alignment Test misalignment plus parallel misalignment shall not exceed 0. 42 .2 Discontinuities The thread form shall be complete over the length for perfect thread and shall not contain discontinuities such as tears.5 Surface Finish Requirements B.4.0 ft (0.4. Care shall be taken to 1 make certain the coupling does not shoulder on either mandrel. The extent of parallel misalignment shall be determined by the use of a micrometer indicator on the turned piece of the outer end as the assembly is rotated.5. in whole or in part.4. (0. Maximum angular misalignment shall not exceed 0.020 in. Tapping marks in the counterbore of couplings and sub-couplings shall not be considered to be detrimental. Examples of some discontinuities are shown in Annex O. Couplings manufactured by boring and threading-through from one end shall be exempt from thread alignment testing. then screwing onto the other end of the coupling or sub- coupling into a lathe-turned piece which will provide a measured length of about 1. Thread alignment tests on couplings and sub-couplings shall be made by screwing the sub-coupling onto a threaded test mandrel which has been accurately centered in a lathe. All rights reserved. (0.4. ruptures. This document is not an API Standard.1 Machined Surfaces Surface finish roughness of the machined surfaces of pin ends shall not be greater than 125 μin. B. B. B. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.91 mm) in 12 1/2 ft (3. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.179 degrees [15/32 in (11. d The length of stress relief (LSR) is measured before thread rolling.020 in.508 mm). A taper of /16 in.4.3 m). it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.

3 for alternate lengths.1 and the lengths in Table C.2.2 Design Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the design of steel sucker rods and pony rods. This document is not an API Standard. C. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. C.1 – Steel Sucker Rod and Pony Rod Illustration 43 . in whole or in part. All rights reserved.2 for customary lengths or Table C. Annex C (normative) Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods C. Copyright API. Figure C. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 General Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements in this Standard.1. the dimensions in Table C.1 Dimensional Requirements Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure C.

2 – Customary Lengths for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Dimensional Element a in.69 diameter. Minimum 42. sucker rod Minimum 294.719 43.2 a See Figure C.00 3606.35 0.000 50.78 0.172 4.000 50.875 73.00 2286.98 2.75 1.43 1.250 6.00 3505.375 34. 44 .411 35.35 0.52 0. Table C.0 6 ft. in whole or in part.79 mm).224 31. b See Figure C. Minimum 114.00 1066. Table C.00 2997. Minimum 66. mm LRD b Maximum 298. mm in.00 2387.2 25 ft. pony rod Minimum 18.00 1676.734 18.44 0.66 2.78 1.93 1.55 1.25 0.6 Maximum 142.282 32.4 Maximum 94.531 38.80 LWS d Minimum 1.19 1.031 26.55 2.500 38.2 Maximum 46. 3/4 in. 1 1/8 in.172 4.00 558. Minimum 90.63 1. d Minimum length. rod body Minimum 0.8 2 ft. All rights reserved.28 length. c See Figure B.156 (29. mm in. f Typically verified in forging die qualifications.625 41.00 9093.8 12 ft.250 6.23 1.859 21.125 79.758 19.10 1.193 55.12 1.00 1778.36 mm) and a minimum 1.750 69.375 60.1 – Dimensions for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Reference Size a 5/8 in.37 0. Minimum 354.2 30 ft.982 24. length.969 24.1.109 2.90 radius.281 32.83 diameter.38 3.2 10 ft.505 38. mm SNT c 5/8 TSRP 3/4 TSRP 7/8 TSRP Reference 1 TSRP 1 1/8 TSRP size. b Sucker rods and pony rods shall be measured from the contact face of the pin shoulder to the contact face of the pin shoulder.00 457.37 RUT f Maximum 2.76 0.250 6. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.500 63. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.55 WWS g Maximum 0. (22.00 7467.61 1.906 23. upset transition Minimum 1. 1 in.009 25.969 24.75 1. The shape of the radius to the wrench square is optional with the manufacturer. wrench square RUB e Maximum 0.611 15.344 34.35 radius. exclusive of fillet.08 1.05 0. upset bead Minimum 1.07 DUB Maximum 1.883 22.61 0.00 8991.85 1.82 0.01 1.33 2.500 88. Table B. wrench square Minimum 0.78 0. upset bead Minimum 0.80 2.844 21.23 mm) Grade HY sucker rods shall be a maximum 1.19 1.125 53.188 4.750 44.2.64 0.6 8 ft.85 3. This document is not an API Standard.54 1. e Typically verified in forging die qualifications.45 2.250 31.00 1168.250 31.469 37.50 2.094 (27.6 Maximum 358.632 16.31 a Reference size is the nominal rod body diameter (DRB).76 0. Copyright API.00 7569. length.105 28.911 48.94 1.135 28.109 2. g Wrench square width (WWS) for 7/8 in. 7/8 in.250 31. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.172 4.031 26.75 1. Dimensional Element b in. Minimum 138.094 27.250 82.89 width.1. mm in.188 4. nominal thread DRB Maximum 0.4 4 ft.03 3.0 Maximum 118.1.8 Maximum 70.00 2895.6 LRD b Maximum 22.37 0. mm in.

70 9847.2 1.3 – Alternate Lengths for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Dimensional Element a in.0 m Minimum 151.3. C.00 7949.2 0.10 1449.70 9949.2 3.00 7847.40 847.2 8. C.6 a See Figure C.1 Chemical Analysis A chemical analysis shall be performed on each heat number of steel used in the manufacture of steel sucker rods and pony rods. mm LRD b Maximum 313. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. in whole or in part.2.40 2347.0 m Minimum 72.1 Chemical Compositions Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall conform to the chemical composition requirements in Table C.2 1.2 10. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6.2 2.2 3.70 1847.10 2847.6 Maximum 37.2 4.80 3449.6 Maximum 135.2 and the dimensions in Table B.10 2949. This analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM A751.6 Maximum 391.6 Maximum 96. b Sucker rods and pony rods shall be measured from the contact face of the pin shoulder to the contact face of the pin shoulder.5 m length.10 1347.4 for the grade specified.0 m length.2 Pin and Thread Type The pin and thread type for steel sucker rods and pony rods shall conform to the configuration shown in Figure B. Table C.1.3.70 449.50 3949.50 3847.0 m Minimum 112. 45 .40 949.5 m Minimum 53.1.2. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.5 m Minimum 131.0 m Minimum 387.2. Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be manufactured and supplied with the same nominal thread size (SNT) on each end.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement.3. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. C.6 LRD b Maximum 17.6 Maximum 155. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Copyright API.0 m Minimum 33.3 Material Requirements C. steel pony rod Minimum 13.40 2449.80 3347. steel sucker rod Minimum 309.2 2.5 m Minimum 92. This document is not an API Standard.2.70 347.1 for sucker rod pin threads (T SRP).6 Maximum 116.6 Maximum 57.3. All rights reserved.70 1949.6 Maximum 76.

155 b 1. per heat number after final heat treatment. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. 8 in. of Area. All rights reserved.2 Mechanical Properties After final heat treatment. --.4 – Grade. minimum minimum maximum minimum minimum Case b Core b Color Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa ksi Mpa % % HRC BRN Code C UNS G10XX or 60 414 90 621 115 793 13 40 --. steel sucker rods and pony rods shall conform to the mechanical property requirements in Table C.069 10 40 --. Orange and molybdenum that totals a alloy minimum of 1.069 b --. White carbon UNS G15XX Series Steel a K UNS G43XX or 60 414 90 621 115 793 13 40 --.. chromium. --. one near the beginning and one near the end of each furnace lot. This document is not an API Standard.3.3. special 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 40 --. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. an acceptable alternate is a minimum of two mechanical tests performed on at least one rod body at the beginning of the furnace lot run once all parameters have been established. C. If the manufacturer can document control of heat treatment processes by continuous monitoring and/or statistical process control. --. --. chromium. --. Brown carbon UNS G15XX Series Steel a DA alloy UNS G41XX Series Steel a 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 40 --.069 8 30 --. A minimum of two mechanical tests shall be performed on at least two rod bodies. Chemical Composition. Blue alloy UNS G46XX Series Steel a DC UNS G10XX or 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 40 --. All rods in a furnace lot heat treated prior to establishing heat treatment parameters shall be reheat treated within the established parameters. in whole or in part. --.15% alloying content HY case UNS G41XX Series Steel a --. Elongation Reduction 0. C. Mechanical Property. HA alloy UNS G41XX Series Steel a 115 793 140 965 155 1. --. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.3 Color Codes Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall conform to the color code requirements in Table C.1 Mechanical Property Testing Mechanical property testing for steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be performed in accordance with Annex N. C.15% alloying content.3. Yellow Special alloy shall be any chemical composition that contains a DS combination of nickel. --. Table C.2% Offset Tensile. Green Special alloy shall be any chemical composition that contains a HS combination of nickel. Purple and molybdenum that totals a alloy minimum of 1. --. --. Copyright API. and Color Code Requirements for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Yield. ≥42 ≤224 Pink hardened a Or an equivalent international series number steel. special 115 793 140 965 155 1.2.4 for the grade specified.4 for the grade specified. --. 46 .

or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DUB or set the gap gauge to assure DUB is diameter. b) Support racks and/or tables for inspecting and testing processes shall not exceed 72 in. Caliper. within the maximum length. sucker rod or pony rod.3 Dimensional Inspection Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be inspected in accordance with Table C. The maximum unsupported length of the product ends shall not be greater than 6 in. This document is not an API Standard. LRD shall not be longer than the maximum. minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LWS or set the gap gauge to assure LWS is 47 .4. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. (152. rod body. (1828. DUB shall not be smaller than the minimum. Copyright API. LRD shall not be shorter than the minimum. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DUB or set the gap gauge to assure DUB is within the minimum diameter.2 Inspection Racks and/or Tables For Body and End Straightness Supports for inspecting and testing steel sucker rods shall. LWS b Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LWS or set the gap gauge to assure LWS is length.2. If a non-conformance is found. in whole or in part. DUB Micrometer.1 General Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented procedures.5. DRB shall not be smaller than the minimum.5 – Dimensional Inspection of Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Check For Gauge or Measuring Instrument a Procedure DRB Micrometer.4. wrench square. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined below. within the maximum diameter. LWS shall not be longer than the maximum. LRD Tape Measure or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LRD or set the gap gauge to assure LRD is length. b The minimum tensile value is not a requirement but a reference based on hardness values. DRB shall not be larger than the maximum. All rights reserved. the product shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7. C.4 Dimensional and Surface Finish Inspection Requirements C.5.4.8 mm) between support racks or tables and shall have all centers in the same plane.4. DUB shall not be larger than the maximum. Table C. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LRD or set the gap gauge to assure LRD is within the minimum length.4 mm). Caliper. upset bead. within the maximum length. C. as a minimum conform to the following requirements. C. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. within the maximum diameter. Sucker rod pin threads (TSRP) shall be inspected in accordance with B. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DRB or set the gap gauge to assure DRB is diameter. a) Support racks and/or tables shall have contact surfaces that are non-abrasive to the rod. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DRB or set the gap gauge to assure DRB is within the minimum diameter.

(3.65 mm) measured on one side.2 Bends C.1 Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods 4 ft (1.125 in (3. Kinks shall not be straightened and are cause for rejection. (152.30 mm). Copyright API.4. This document is not an API Standard.4. C. b) A straight edge with a gauge length of 12. The amount of the bend is the gap measured between the straight edge and the concave rod surface. WWS shall not be larger than the maximum. (6. The straight edge shall be held on the concave side of the bend.4.4.2 Steel Pony Rods Less Than 4 ft (1. LWS shall not be shorter than the minimum. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for WWS or set the gap gauge to assure WWS is within the minimum diameter.18 mm).1 Rod Body Straightness Requirements C.22 m) in Length 48 .4 mm) wide.2.1 Kinks Bar stock or rod bodies shall be measured for kinks as follows.4.1. exclusive of fillets. The maximum allowable gap in the middle of the gauge length is 0. (152. a Anvils on measuring instruments shall not be less than 0. Caliper. WWS Micrometer. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.4.065 in. b Minimum length. (1. wrench square.250 in. All rights reserved. The maximum allowable gap is 0. C. (304.34 mm) in any 60 in. The straight edge is held on the concave side where the maximum bend or kink is identified. or Gap Gauge c Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for WWS or set the gap gauge to assure WWS is width. a) Circular runout is measured on the surface of the rod at a distance (gauge length) of 6. Runout values are twice the amount of the gap over the gauge length.4.4. within the minimum length. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1.130 in.00 in. c The length of anvils on measuring instruments shall be equal to or exceed the width of the wrench square.4 mm) straight edge shall be used as the gauge length to measure the location where the bar stock or rod body is locally bent and no longer straight.0 in.4. (3. Bends may be straightened however straightening of bends after final heat treatment is not acceptable.4. A 6.8 mm) shall be used to determine the maximum allowable bend. Bends shall be measured by one of the following methods.1.4 Straightness Requirements Bar stock supplied by the mill/supplier and processed rods shall be inspected for straightness. within the maximum diameter.250 in.2.4. WWS shall not be smaller than the minimum.0 in.2 mm) and not greater than 0. (6.125 in. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. C. C.1. (152. in whole or in part.4 mm) from a support.22 m) and Greater in Length Steel sucker rod and pony rods 4 ft (1.4 cm) section of rod body.22 m) and greater in length shall be inspected for bends. The maximum allowable circular runout shall be 0. The amount of kink is defined as the gap measured between the middle of the gauge straight edge to the surface of the bar stock or rod body. Cumulative and consecutive measurements for bends shall not exceed 0.

When the depth of a discontinuity cannot be measured. After removal. (0.2 End Straightness Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be inspected for end straightness. If a discontinuity is found.10 mm) from the adjacent surfaces and need not be removed. 49 . (0. The amount of straightness shall be measured at the machined surface of the pin shoulder diameter.4. (0. All rights reserved.65 mm). Runout values are twice the amount of the gap over the gauge length.4. all dimensional requirements shall be met. End straightness shall be measured as follows.22 m) in length shall be inspected for bends. The maximum allowable circular runout shall be 0. all dimensional requirements shall be met.00 in.1. (1.020 in.2 mm) from a support. The maximum allowable circular runout is 0. The rest of the rod shall be supported with all supports at a maximum distance of 6. Steel sucker rod and pony rods less than 4 ft (1.8 mm) shall be used to determine the maximum allowable bend. This document is not an API Standard.4. the discontinuity shall be removed to attain a smooth transition. The straight edge shall be held on the concave side of the bend. The maximum allowable gap is 0.033 in.2 Transverse Discontinuities Transverse discontinuities are acceptable provided the depth does not exceed 0. End straightness is measured via a dial indicator.130 in (3.51 mm) from the adjacent surfaces and need not be removed. (152.4. C.1 Rod Body C.065 in.84 mm) measured on one side. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Longitudinal discontinuities which are greater than 0.83 m) apart with centers in the same plane.1. in whole or in part. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. laser or other comparable measuring device.5. (0.30 mm). After removal.51 mm) are unacceptable and shall be removed to attain a smooth transition.00 in. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. C. The amount of the bend is the gap measured between the straight edge and the concave rod surface.4. C. C. Transverse discontinuities greater than 0.020 in. (0.5. The rod body shall be supported at a distance of 6. Bends shall be measured by one of the following methods. b) A straight edge with a gauge length of 12.1 Longitudinal Discontinuities Longitudinal discontinuities are acceptable provided the depth or height does not exceed 0. the manufacturer shall determine if the product meets acceptance criteria.10 mm) from the adjacent surfaces are unacceptable and shall be removed to attain a smooth transition.00 ft (1. Copyright API. a) Circular runout is measured on the surface of the rod at a distance (gauge length) of 3. (304.4 mm) from the pin shoulder.5 Surface Discontinuities The rod body and upset taper shall be inspected for discontinuities.5.4. (76.0 in.004 in.004 in. All dimensional requirements shall be met after removal.

at the option of the manufacturer.5. f) The month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12 chronologically. If applied to both ends.20 mm) from the adjacent surfaces and need not be removed. (0.5. b) Standard.1 Longitudinal and Transverse Discontinuities Longitudinal and transverse discontinuities are acceptable provided the depth or height does not exceed 0. with 2017 represented as the number 17. (0.8 mm) are unacceptable and shall be removed to attain a smooth transition. Longitudinal and transverse discontinuities which are greater than 0.79 mm). (0.2. the following product identification markings shall be applied to the wrench square. e) Heat code.008 in. low stress permanent marking or any combination.4. with January represented as number 01. on one or both ends. The depth of the markings shall not be less than 0.8 mm) from the adjacent surfaces and need not be removed. C. Copyright API. C. all dimensional requirements shall be met. g) The year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year.3 Pits Pits are acceptable provided the depth does not exceed 0. the product identification markings on each end shall be complete.1 Product Identification Markings As a minimum.4. C.032 in. C.1). c) Reference size (see Table C. (0.4. C. all dimensional requirements shall be met. (0. After removal.032 in (0.4.2 Pits Pits are acceptable provided the depth does not exceed 0.8 mm) from the adjacent surfaces are unacceptable and shall be removed to attain a smooth transition. Pits with depths greater than 0. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.20 mm) from adjacent surfaces are unacceptable and shall be removed to attain a smooth transition. (0. (0. laser engraving. forged.010 in.032 in. 11B. d) Grade (see Table C. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2 Upset Taper C.031 in.5 Marking Requirements Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be permanently and legibly marked prior to final heat treatment. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.008 in.1.5. Methods of markings shall include die stamped. After removal.4). After removal.5. in any order.25 mm) nor greater than 0. a) Manufacturer’s name or mark. all dimensional requirements shall be met.032 in.8 mm) from the adjacent surfaces and need not be removed. in whole or in part. Pits greater than 0.5. This document is not an API Standard. All rights reserved. 50 .2.

2 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings A temporary protective coating shall be applied to the rod body. (15.6.6. C.5.6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Manufacturer’s Name or Mark Standard Reference Size Grade Heat Code Month of Manufacture Year of Manufacture --. Copyright API.2. C.88 mm). but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. upset area and machined pin surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling.6. manufactured in January of 2017 shall be marked.1: This thread storage compound shall be removed from the pin and an acceptable thread lubricant shall be applied before the coupling or sub-coupling is made-up to assure adequate connection preload stress (see API 11BR). Table C. All rights reserved. This document is not an API Standard. transportation and storage.2 Rod Body and Upset Area 51 . as shown in Table C. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser.6. These coatings shall be applied before transportation of the steel sucker rods and pony rods and shall be maintained during storage. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. C. in any order. 01 17 C.1 External Thread Protectors External thread protectors shall be designed and installed to protect pin threads and contact faces from physical damage during handling. Grade DA steel sucker rod. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. C. in whole or in part. Note C. C. transportation and storage.1 Example of Product Identification Markings 3 A reference size /4 in. 11B 3/4 DA --.2 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings which include the API Monogram and license number may be applied on the same or opposing wrench flats of the same wrench square.1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.5.1 Machined Pin Surfaces A temporary atmospheric corrosion inhibitor thread storage compound shall be applied to machined pin surfaces prior to the installation of thread protectors.6.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all steel sucker rods and pony rods. C.2.

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
The manufacturer shall provide steel sucker rods and pony rods with a hydrocarbon removable coating (HRC)
applied to all rod body and upset area surfaces. HRCs that do not obscure product identification markings are
preferred.

C.6.3 Color Codes

Color codes, according to the requirements in Table C.4, shall be clearly visible on at least one thread protector cap
of every rod.

C.6.4 Palletizing Steel Sucker Rods

Steel sucker rods shall be palletized to conform to the following requirements.

a) Prior to palletizing, all machined surfaces shall be coated per C.6.2.1 and thread protectors shall be installed per
C.6.1.

b) Rod surfaces shall be protected per C.6.2.2 and manufacturer’s written procedures.

c) The width of a steel sucker rod pallet shall be 30 in. ± 1 in. (762 mm ± 25 mm) unless agreed to by purchase
agreement.

d) Crosswise supports, spacers and blocks shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the sucker rod.

e) The maximum distance from the edge of a support/spacer to the end of the sucker rod (coupling, if installed) shall
be 20 in. (508 mm).

f) The maximum center-to-center distance down the length of the sucker rod for supports/spacers shall be equal to
or less than 72 in. (1.83 m).

g) Crosswise supports, spacers or blocks shall be provided along the bottom of each pallet and shall be of sufficient
thickness as to prevent the sucker rod pin ends or couplings, if attached, from resting directly on a flat surface.

h) Supports/spacers shall be provided such that rows of sucker rod pin ends or couplings, if attached, do not contact
each other during transportation.

i) Steel sucker rods shall be placed between crosswise supports and spacers such that the ends of the supports and
spacers extend beyond the steel sucker rods in the pallet.

C.6.5 Palletizing Steel Pony Rods

Steel pony rods shall be palletized according to the manufacturer’s requirements such that the rods will not be
damaged during handling, transportation and storage.

C.7 Handling, Transportation and Storage of Finished Products

The following general requirements shall be followed for the handling, transportation and storage of all steel sucker
rods and pony rods.
52

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.

C.7.1 General Requirements

a) Care shall be exercised to prevent rods from contacts which might cause damage to the rod body, threads, and/or
contact faces.

b) Steel sucker rods and/or pony rods shall never be hammered on with metallic tools for any reason.

c) During all handling, transportation and storage operations, there shall be sufficient clearance around palletized
and un-palletized rods for safe handling and easy access.

d) Palletized and un-palletized rods shall not be lifted using chains, cables, wires or when forklift tines contact the
rod(s).

e) Crosswise supports, spacers, blocks, and racks or sills shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the rod.

C.7.2 Handling Requirements

a) Handling and lifting devices (e.g., forklifts, spreader bars, tee hooks, nylon straps, etc.) shall be properly designed
and rated per industry standards.

b) During all handling operations, rods shall be supported by at least two points to prevent excessive bends. Care
shall be exercised to prevent rods from contacts which might cause nicks or damage to the threads by jamming of
the thread protectors. Further, the rods shall never be handled in such a manner as to produce a permanent kink or
bend. Kinked, bent, or nicked rods are permanently damaged and shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7.2.5.

c) Palletized rods shall be lifted and laid down as a single pallet with a handling and lifting device designed to
support the rods without causing damage.

d) Un-palletized rods shall be lifted and laid down individually, as a single rod, either by hand or with a handling and
lifting device designed to support the rod without causing damage.

C.7.3 Transportation Requirements for Finished Products

a) All applicable federal, state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed.

b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized rods shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specification for
transportation of the product.

c) Palletized and un-palletized rods shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the
transport vehicle. Restraints shall not apply stress to the rods and shall be placed in such positions as to pass over
crosswise supports.

d) Transport vehicles for handling palletized rods shall be provided with blockage, as required for the removal of
lifting devices, placed directly under the crosswise supports of the pallet so the rods themselves shall not be in
contact with the blockage or transport vehicle. The pallets shall be stacked so the crosswise supports of the upper
pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet.

53

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
e) Transport vehicles for handling un-palletized rods shall provide at least four blockages, as required for the
removal of lifting devices, and the end supports shall be located approximately 12 in. (300 mm) from the rod ends so
the rods themselves shall not be in contact with the transport vehicle. The rod layers shall be separated by spacers
placed directly above the blockage. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent the rods from contacting adjacent
layers. If the spacers are not notched, the outside rods in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the rods from rolling
off the spacers.

C.7.4 Storage Requirements for Finished Products

a) The storage of steel sucker rods and pony rods shall not create hazards, obstruct access to emergency
equipment, or impede ingress and egress traffic.

b) Steel sucker rods and pony rods shall be separated and stored on support racks or sills according to the grade,
size and length of the rod. The rods shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize
deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments.

c) For palletized rods, a support rack or sill shall be provided for each crosswise support in the pallet. Palletized rods
stored in stacks, one above the other, shall be blocked, interlocked and limited in height so the stack is stable, self-
supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. The pallets in the stack shall be aligned so the crosswise supports
of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet.

d) For un-palletized rods, a minimum of four support racks or sills shall be provided with the end supports located
approximately 12 in. (300 mm) from the rod ends. Un-palletized rods stored in layers, one above the other, shall be
blocked, interlocked and limited in height so the layers are stable, self-supporting and secure against sliding or
collapse. The rods in each layer shall be separated by spacers placed directly above a support rack or sill. If the
spacers are not notched, the outside rods in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the rods from rolling off the
spacers. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent rods from contacting rods in adjacent layers.

e) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height.

f) Stored rods shall be inspected at regular intervals. Pin ends are provided with thread protectors. Whenever
observed to be without such protection, the pin end should be assessed for damage, cleaned with a nonabrasive
brush, a suitable atmospheric corrosion inhibitor applied (see C.7.2.1) and thread protectors installed (see C.7.1).
Any rust on rod bodies shall be removed with a wire brush and a suitable HRC applied (see C.7.2.2). For long term
storage requirements, see API 11BR.

C.8 Ordering Information

The following general guidelines are suggested for ordering steel sucker rods and pony rods.

a) Reference size (Table C.1)

b) Length, customary (Table C.2) or alternate (Table C.3)

c) Grade (Table C.4)

d) Quantity

54

e) Special packaging requirements. This document is not an API Standard. if applicable Annex D (normative) Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Sucker Rods and Pony Rods 55 . Copyright API. in whole or in part. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.

1 – Dimensions for End Fittings Dimensional Element b Reference Size a 56 .2.2 and the dimensions in Table B. D.1 – End Fitting Illustration D. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 General Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) sucker rods and pony rods shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements in this Standard.1 Pin and Thread Type The pin and thread type for end fittings shall conform to the configuration shown in Figure B. Table D. D. Copyright API. Figure D. D. in whole or in part. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved.1. This document is not an API Standard.2.1 for sucker rod pin threads (T SRP).1 End Fitting Dimensional Requirements End fittings for FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure D. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2 Design Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the design of FRP sucker rods and pony rods.1.1 and the dimensions shown in Table D.

3/4 in. in. 7/8 in.2.505 38.900 22. mm in.025 26.69 0. Table B.344 34.0 10.250 31. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.850 21. 1 2 1 End Fitting 2 FRP Rod Body Figure D.75 1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. 1 in.14 1. e Minimum length. 57 .275 32.725 18.75 1.490 38.469 37. D.2 – Assembled FRP Sucker Rod and Pony Rod Illustration D.2.23 1.2.00 254.14 1. mm in.225 31. d The length of the extension is optional with manufacturer.0 10.86 1.39 diameter. mm in.281 32.250 31.54 1. This document is not an API Standard.31 a The reference size is the nominal FRP rod body diameter (D RB).2 Assembled FRP Sucker Rod and Pony Rod Dimensional Requirements Assembled FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure D. wrench square Minimum 0.21 1.031 26.19 1.344 34.005 50.2.89 width.69 0.00 254. nominal thread DEF Maximum 1.39 1.0 10.725 18.525 38. end fitting LWS e Minimum 1.75 1.490 37.02 1.74 diameter. mm in.281 32.531 38.630 41.75 length.240 31.0 10.1. 1 1/4 in. end fitting extension DRB Maximum 0.40 2.969 24.00 254.75 1.505 38. Copyright API.00 254.42 0.1.12 LEF Maximum 10. FRP rod body Minimum 0.00 254.025 26.1 FRP Rod Body Validation Testing Manufacturers shall perform the following tests and verify conformance to the manufacturer’s documented specifications: a) Hardness in accordance with ASTM D2583.62 1.775 19.150 29.2.85 1. c) Horizontal shear length as specified in ASTM D4475.14 1. in whole or in part. wrench square WWS Maximum 1.77 1.23 1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 3/4 in.04 1.281 32.250 31.2 and the customary lengths shown in Table D. b See Figure D.775 19.42 0.0 length.620 41.275 32. exclusive of fillet.54 1.85 1. end fitting Minimum 1.975 24. All rights reserved.55 DFE d Maximum 1. b) Ignition loss conforming to ASTM D2584.344 34.59 0.990 50.54 1. c See Figure B.025 26.88 1. mm SNT c 5/8 TSRP 3/4 TSRP 3/4 TSRP 7/8 TSRP Reference 1 TSRP size.04 1.250 31.04 1.250 31.255 31.93 diameter.61 1.

Minimum 102.1 Chemical Composition 58 . in whole or in part.00 8991.00 7467. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.0 6 ft.2 37.00 762.2.00 9093.6 LRD b Maximum 358.00 11277.3 Material Requirements D.2 – Customary Lengths for FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Dimensional Element a in.0 a See Figure D.00 5334.00 5435.2 25 ft. Copyright API. All rights reserved.5 Rod Weight The manufacturer shall establish the average rod weight. Minimum 294.00 863. LRD b Minimum 66. Minimum 30.6 Maximum 34.00 11379. FRP sucker rod Minimum 354. D.4 Stress Range Diagram The manufacturer shall develop a Modified Goodman Diagram to establish the allowable stresses for each grade of end fitting and temperature rating of the FRP sucker rod and pony rod. Table D. b The nominal length is measured from the contact face of the pin shoulder of the end fitting to the contact face of the pin shoulder on the opposite end fitting. Minimum 210.2. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2.00 1676.2 30 ft.0 Maximum 70.6 Maximum 448.00 2692.3 Operating Temperature and Cycle Life The manufacturer shall specify the maximum operating temperature and number of cycles to expected first failure for FRP sucker rods and pony rods. D.00 7569.2.6 3 ft. D. FRP pony rod Maximum 106. Length. D. This document is not an API Standard.3.4 9 ft.5 ft Minimum 444. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. mm Maximum 298. for each full length FRP sucker rod and pony rod.8 Maximum 214.4 Length.6 18 ft.00 1778. according to documented methods.00 2590. expressed in lb/ft (kg/m).

Chemical Composition. A minimum of two mechanical tests shall be performed for any material lacking a material test report (MTR). Copyright API.1. be traceable to the manufacturer and include the date of manufacture. D.3. D. D.3 for the grade of end fitting specified. FRP rod body materials shall conform to the requirements in 6.3.2.3 – Grade. An MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.3.3. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6.2.1 Chemical Analysis A chemical analysis shall be performed on each heat number of steel used in the manufacture of end fittings for FRP sucker rods and pony rods. This document is not an API Standard.3 Color Codes FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall conform to the color code requirements listed in Table D. D.1.2 Mechanical Properties End fittings shall conform to the mechanical property requirements listed in Table D.3.3.1 End Fittings End fitting materials shall conform to the chemical compositions requirements listed in Table D.2.3 for the grade specified.3.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2 FRP Rod Body The manufacturer shall develop documented specifications for FRP rod body materials and shall define those characteristics critical to the performance of the product. in whole or in part.3. D.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement provided there has been no subsequent heat treatment or other special processes requiring validation.3 for the grade specified. Table D. All rights reserved. This analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM A751. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.1.3. D.1 Mechanical Property Testing Mechanical property testing for end fittings shall be performed in accordance with Annex N. Reductio ..2.3. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. minimum minimum maximum minimum minimum Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa ksi Mpa % % Color Code C UNS G10XX or UNS G15XX Series Steel 60 414 90 621 115 793 10 20 White carbon a K UNS G43XX or UNS G46XX Series Steel 60 414 90 621 115 793 10 20 Blue alloy a DC UNS G10XX or UNS G15XX Series Steel 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Brown carbon a DA UNS G41XX Series Steel a 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Yellow 59 .2.2% offset n of Area Tensile 2 in. 0.1. Mechanical Property and Color Code Requirements for End Fittings Elongation Yield. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.

outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. end fitting. in whole or in part. a Or an equivalent international series number steel. within the maximum diameter. This document is not an API Standard.4.6 mm). and molybdenum 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Orange alloy that totals a minimum of 1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.4 Dimensional Inspection Requirements D. end fitting extension. within the maximum diameter.2 Inspection Racks and/or Tables Supports for inspecting and testing FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall. DRB shall not be larger than the maximum. D. b) Support racks and/or tables for inspecting and testing processes shall not exceed 126 in.4.4. (3200. chromium. maximum DRB Micrometer. FRP rod body. The maximum unsupported length of the product ends shall not be greater than 24 in. D. Caliper. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DRB or set the gap gauge to assure DRB is diameter.2. Caliper. Copyright API.4. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined below. a) Support racks and/or tables shall have contact surfaces that are non-abrasive to the rod. the product shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7.3 Dimensional Inspection FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall be inspected in accordance with Table D. within the maximum diameter. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DEF or set the gap gauge to assure DEF is within the minimum diameter. D. DEF shall not be smaller than the minimum. DFE shall not be larger than the maximum. If a non-conformance is found. Table D. 60 . DFE b Micrometer. as a minimum conform to the following requirements.15% alloying content. DEF shall not be larger than the maximum. All rights reserved. (609. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DEF or set the gap gauge to assure DEF is diameter. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DFE or set the gap gauge to assure DFE is diameter. Pins and sucker rod pin threads (TSRP) shall be inspected in accordance with B.4 – Dimensional Inspection of FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods Check For Gauge or Measuring Instrument a Procedure DEF Micrometer.5.4.4 mm) between support racks or tables and shall have all centers in the same plane. Caliper. alloy Special alloy shall be any chemical DS composition that contains a combination special of nickel.1 General Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented procedures.

low stress permanent marking or any combination. (3. when performed. Copyright API. laser engraving. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LRD.031 in. maximum. forged. c The diameter of the pin shoulder (DPS) is the same diameter as the end fitting (DEF). minimum WWS Micrometer. maximum LRD Tape Measure Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LRD. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. within the maximum width.4 Tension Load Testing Every FRP sucker rod and pony rod shall be tension load tested to a minimum of 110% of the maximum allowable stress (working load). The depth of the markings shall not be less than 0. LWS shall not be shorter than the minimum. Caliper. e Minimum length. LRD shall not be longer than the Length. wrench square. Methods of markings shall include die stamped. and heat treatment.010 in. D. 61 . 1) for the end fittings. d The length of anvils on measuring instruments shall be equal to or exceed the width of the wrench square (W WS).5. mechanical properties. within the minimum length.125 in.2 mm) and not greater than 0. Manufacturers shall establish and maintain documented procedures defining the marking process and at what stage the markings are to be applied to ensure traceability for each component of the assembly. (0. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.250 in.4 mm) wide. As FRP rods are an assembled product.1 End Fitting Marking Requirements Marking requirements for end fitting traceability is separate from the marking requirements for assembled FRP sucker rods and/or pony rod traceability and the manufacturer shall define marking requirements for end fittings to ensure full traceability for chemical composition. (6. a Anvils on micrometers and gap gauges shall not be less than 0. pin shoulder to wrench flat. the marking requirements are separated into two sets of requirements. end fitting. in whole or in part.5 Marking Requirements End fittings and assembled FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall be permanently and legibly marked on the wrench flats – only. b The length of the extension is optional with manufacturer. and 2) for the assembled FRP sucker rod and/or pony rod. at the option of the manufacturer. DRB shall not be smaller than the minimum. within the maximum length. within the maximum length.25 mm) nor greater than 0. LEF Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LEF or set the gap gauge to assure LEF is length. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. D. This document is not an API Standard. maximum LPF Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LPF or set the gap gauge to assure LPF is length.4. wrench square. prior to final acceptance. LWS e Caliper or Gap Gauge Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LWS or set the gap gauge to assure LWS is Length. WWS shall not be smaller than the minimum. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DRB or set the gap gauge to assure DRB is within the minimum diameter. WWS shall not be larger than the maximum. LRD shall not be shorter than the minimum. or Gap Gauge d Maximum: measure to the maximum width for WWS or set the gap gauge to assure WWS is diameter. exclusive of fillet. LEF shall not be longer than the maximum. FRP sucker rod and pony rod. as stated in the manufacturer’s specification. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum width for WWS or set the gap gauge to assure WWS is within the minimum width. D. (0.79 mm). LPF shall not be longer than the maximum. All rights reserved.

5. 27 2017 with an assembly temperature rating of 185 °F (85 °C). and in addition to the existing end fitting marking requirements.2 Assembled FRP Sucker Rod and/or Pony Rod Marking Requirements The manufacturer shall define marking requirements for assembled FRP sucker rods and/or pony rods to ensure full traceability of the end fittings and FRP rod bodies either by identification code. in any order: a) Manufacturer’s name or mark. in any order: a) Temperature rating of the assembled FRP sucker rod and/or pony rod. Copyright API.3). b) Standard. in Fahrenheit or Celsius. Grade C end fitting manufactured on December. As a minimum. the following product identification markings shall be applied to the wrench square of the end fitting. D. e) Heat code. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. in whole or in part. g) The year of manufacturer shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year. The product identification markings shall include the assembled FRP sucker rod and/or pony rod temperature rating. assembly date or both. the temperature rating shall be followed by a “C” to denote Celsius. If the temperature rating is in Celsius. D.3 Example of Product Identification Markings 7 A /8 TSRP. f) The month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12 chronologically with January represented as the number 01. The sequence shall be the day of the year (as three digits) and year (as two digits) with no space between digits. (22. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.23 mm) reference diameter rod body on January.1). outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.5 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Assembled FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods (temperature rating in Fahrenheit) END FITTING REQUIREMENTS ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS Manufacturer’s Reference Size and Nominal Month of Year of Temperature Name or Mark Standard Thread Size Grade Heat Code Manufacture Manufacture Rating Julian Date --. shall be marked as follows: Table D.5. 14 2016. assembled on a 1 in. b) Julian day of the assembly. 12 16 185 02717 62 . This document is not an API Standard. All rights reserved. d) Grade of end fitting (see Table D. with 2017 represented as the number 17. As a minimum. the following product identification markings shall be applied to the wrench square of both end fittings. 11B c) Reference size of rod body and nominal thread size (see Table D. 11B 1 – 7/8 C --.

12 16 85C 02717 D. D. D. D. transportation and storage.6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Assembled FRP Sucker Rods and Pony Rods (temperature rating in Celsius) END FITTING REQUIREMENTS ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS Manufacturer’s Reference Size and Nominal Month of Year of Temperature Name or Mark Standard Thread Size Grade Heat Code Manufacture Manufacture Rating Julian Date --.3. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. D.4 Palletizing FRP Sucker Rods 63 . Copyright API. A coating that does not obscure product identification markings is preferred.6. Note D.5.6. 11B 1 – 7/8 C --.1 The thread storage compound shall be removed from the pin and an acceptable thread lubricant shall be applied before the coupling is made-up to assure adequate connection preload stress (see API 11BR). outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. shall be clearly visible on at least one thread protector cap of every FRP sucker rod and pony rod.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all FRP sucker rods and pony rods. Table D. D.2 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings A temporary protective coating shall be applied to the end fitting bodies and machined pin surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling.6.4 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings which include the API Monogram and license number may be applied on the same or opposing wrench flats of the same wrench square. A temporary atmospheric corrosion inhibitor thread storage compound shall be applied to machined pin surfaces prior to the installation of thread protectors. The protective coating shall be maintained during storage.1 External Thread Protectors External thread protectors shall be designed and installed to protect pin threads and contact faces from physical damage during handling. transportation and storage. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. The coating shall be applied before transportation of the assembled FRP sucker rod or pony rod. in whole or in part. according to the requirements in Table D.3 Color Codes Color codes. This document is not an API Standard. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser.6. All rights reserved.

D. in whole or in part.7. spacers. The support points shall be located within 1 ft (0. end fittings.6. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. wires or when the forklift tines contact the rod.2 and thread protectors shall be installed per D. and blocks shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the rod. b) Crosswise supports. 64 .1 General Requirements a) Care shall be exercised to prevent rods from contacts which might cause damage to the FRP rod body. spacers. transportation and storage of all FRP sucker rods and pony rods. This document is not an API Standard. d) The pallet shall be designed with support points to allow the palletized rods to be lifted by straps at three points along the full length of the rods. if attached. Sufficient clearance shall be provided to allow placement of the lifting straps beneath the pallet without lifting. FRP sucker rods shall be palletized to conform to the following requirements. from resting directly on a flat surface.5 Palletizing FRP Pony Rods FRP pony rods shall be palletized according to the manufacturer’s requirements such that the rods will not be damaged during handling. D. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products The general requirements shall be followed for the handling.6.1. c) Crosswise supports. do not contact each other during transportation. a) Prior to palletizing. e) Crosswise supports.3 m) of center and at points no more than 6 ft (2 m) from each end. All rights reserved. f) FRP sucker rods shall be placed between crosswise support and spacers such that the ends of the supports and spacers extend beyond the rods in the pallet. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. blocks and racks or sills shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the rod. Copyright API. D. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. c) During all handling. if attached. b) FRP sucker rods and/or pony rods shall never be hammered on with metallic tools for any reason. e) Supports/spacers shall be provided such that rows of end fittings or couplings. there shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized rods for safe handling and easy access. transportation and storage operations. threads. transportation and storage. and/or contact faces. or blocks shall be provided along the bottom of each pallet and shall be of sufficient thickness as to prevent the end fitting and coupling. cables. d) Palletized and un-palletized rods shall not be lifted using chains. end fittings shall be coated per D.7 Handling.6. spacers.

state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed. nominal thread size. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.7. length. 65 . D. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.4 Storage Requirements for Finished Products a) The storage of FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall not create hazards. grade of the end fitting. forklifts. as required for the removal of lifting devices. b) During all handling operations. D. placed directly under the crosswise supports of the pallet so the rods themselves shall not be in contact with the blockage or the transportation vehicle.g. spreader bars. b) FRP sucker rod and pony rods shall be separated and stored on support racks or sills according to the reference dimension. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent the rods from contacting adjacent layers. Restraints shall not apply stress to the rods and shall be placed in such positions as to pass over crosswise supports. as required for the removal of lifting devices. rods shall be supported to prevent excessive bends. If the spacers are not notched. in whole or in part. Copyright API. The rods shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from ultraviolet exposure. The rod layers shall be separated by spacers placed directly above the blockage. e) Transportation vehicles for handling un-palletized rods shall provide at least four blockages. c) Palletized and un-palletized rods shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transportation vehicle. tee hooks.. Care shall be exercised to prevent rods from contacts which might cause nicks or damage to the threads by jamming of the thread protectors. as a single rod.7. and temperature rating of the FRP sucker rod or pony rod. or impede ingress and egress traffic. d) Transportation vehicles for handling palletized rods shall be provided with blockage.) shall be properly designed and rated per industry standards. c) Palletized rods shall be lifted and laid down as a single pallet with a handling and lifting device designed to support the rods without causing damage. D.5. nylon straps. etc.2. This document is not an API Standard.7. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.3 Transportation Requirements for Finished Products a) All applicable federal. obstruct access to emergency equipment.2 Handling Requirements a) Handling and lifting devices (e. (300 mm) from the rod ends so the rods themselves shall not be in contact with the transport vehicle. d) Un-palletized rods shall be lifted and laid down individually. the outside rods in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the rods from rolling off the spacers. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized rods shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specification for transportation of the product. All rights reserved. Damaged product shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7. The pallets shall be stacked so the crosswise supports of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet. and the end supports shall be located approximately 12 in. either by hand or with a handling and lifting device designed to support the rod without causing damage.

shall be blocked.2. a) Reference size (Table D. All rights reserved. d) For un-palletized rods. a minimum of four support racks or sills shall be provided with the end supports located approximately 20 in. Un-palletized rods stored in layers. if required.1) c) Temperature rating of the rod assembly d) Length (Table D. one above the other. interlocked and limited in height so the layers are stable. a support rack or sill shall be provided for each crosswise support in the pallet. self- supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. D. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent rods from contacting rods in adjacent layers. If the spacers are not notched. f) Stored FRP sucker rods and pony rods shall be inspected at regular intervals. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse.8 Ordering Information The following general guidelines are suggested for ordering FRP sucker rods and pony rods. The pallets in the stack shall be aligned so the crosswise supports of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet. one above the other. interlocked and limited in height so the stack is stable.1). the outside rods in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the rods from rolling off the spacers. Whenever observed to be without such protection.7. in whole or in part.2) e) Grade of end fitting (Table D. the pin should be assessed for damage.7. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. This document is not an API Standard. Palletized rods stored in stacks.3) f) Quantity g) Special packaging requirements. shall be blocked. e) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. a suitable atmospheric corrosion inhibitor applied (see D. 66 .1) b) Nominal thread size (Table D. cleaned with a nonabrasive brush. c) For palletized rods.1) and thread protectors installed (see D. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. (300 mm) from the rod ends. Copyright API. The FRP rod body shall be inspected for visible indications of damage. Pins are provided with thread protectors. The rods in each layer shall be separated by spacers placed directly above a support rack or sill.

outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Annex E (normative) Sinker Bars E. Key 1 Pin Thread 2 Wrench Flat 3 Elevator Neck (optional) Figure E. All rights reserved.2 Design Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the design of sinker bars.2. Copyright API. This document is not an API Standard.1 – Sinker Bar Illustration 67 .2.1. the dimensions shown in Table E. E.1 and the customary lengths shown in Table E.1 General Sinker bars shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements provided in this Standard.1 Dimensional Requirements Sinker bars shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure E. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. E. in whole or in part. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.

Table E.982 24.69 LEN e Minimum 4.19 1.250 31.31 1.1 – Dimensions for Sinker Bars Reference Size a 1 1/4 in.009 25.595 40.031 26. Table E. d Elevator neck. pin shoulder Minimum 1.05 0. The same design shall be require on both ends. 1 5/8 in.31 1.15 2.000 101.94 DPS Maximum 1. Dimensional Element b in.05 0.000 101.00 9093.6 Maximum 298.77 0.45 1.6 Maximum 358.60 4. wrench flat WWF g Maximum 1.18 0.969 24.982 24.2 20 ft.125 3. shoulder to flat Minimum 0.2 30 ft.390 35.61 1.63 1.344 34.13 1.750 19.220 30.469 37.18 LSE Maximum 4. mm in.63 1.345 34.16 1.75 1.60 4.75 1. 1 3/4 in.60 4. All rights reserved.750 19.15 2. f Minimum length.344 34.470 37.60 4.345 34. on one end only.00 8991.000 101.83 diameter.31 a The reference size is the nominal sinker bar diameter (DSB).63 1.34 1. c See Figure B.250 31.009 25. --- DEN d Maximum 0.982 24.75 1. mm in. elevator neck Minimum 0. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.60 length. b See Figure E.89 width.1.63 diameter.66 1.60 length.531 38. mm SNT c 5/8 TSRP or 5/8 TSRP or 3/4 TSRP or 7/8 TSRP 7/8 TSRP size.00 5943.250 31.51 1.470 37. exclusive of radius.125 3.69 DSB Maximum 1.00 6045.99 1. sinker bar Minimum 234.640 41. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard.265 32.13 1. Minimum 294.60 4. b The length of sinker bars shall be measured from the outer end of the pin to the outer end of the pin.19 1.220 30.857 21.1.125 3. mm LSB b Maximum 238.640 41.34 1.18 0.250 31. 68 .48 1.884 22.3 for PR threads.83 diameter.2.595 40. exclusive of fillets.66 1. Table B.765 44.2 25 ft. Table B.75 length.750 19. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.05 0.2 – Customary Lengths for Sinker Bars Standard Lengths a in.265 32. Minimum 354.250 57.031 26.750 19.48 1. At a minimum. four wrench flats optional with manufacturer.51 1.250 31. e Minimum length. Copyright API.969 24.00 7467.54 1.54 1. nominal thread Reference Dimension 3/4 TPRP 3/4 TSRP 7/8 TSRP --.16 1. the length of the elevator neck shall safely accommodate a sucker rod elevator.15 2.000 101.750 19.250 57. elevator neck LPF Maximum 0. pin shoulder to elevator neck Minimum 2.250 57.125 3. 1 1/2 in.60 4.250 57. length.720 43.720 43.982 24.94 0. g Two wrench flats standard.281 32.009 25.000 101.765 44.390 35.18 0.000 101.61 0. mm in.000 101. is optional with manufacturer.60 4.000 101.515 38.00 7569.125 3.009 25.281 32.000 101.250 57.15 LWF f.13 1. g Minimum 1.60 4.94 0.515 38. mm in.000 101.05 length.13 1.05 0. or Figure B.18 0.75 1.94 0. sinker bar Minimum 1.1 for SR threads. 1 3/8 in.99 1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. wrench flat Minimum 0.15 2.6 a See Figure E.4.

1.3.2.3 – Grade.3 for the grade specified.3. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Sinker bars shall be manufactured and supplied with the same thread type and nominal thread size (SNT) on each end. Reduction 0.1 Mechanical Property Testing Mechanical property testing for sinker bars shall be performed in accordance with Annex N.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement. Elongation. Chemical Composition. This analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM A751.2.3 for the grade specified. E.3. Table E. shall conform to the mechanical properties requirements listed in Table E.3 Material Requirements E.2 and the dimensions in Table B. E. An MTR conforming to the requirements of 6. E.2 shall be an acceptable means to comply with this requirement provided there has been no subsequent heat treatment or other special processes requiring validation. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to a material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.3 Color Codes Sinker bars shall conform to the color code requirements listed in Table E. All rights reserved.2% offset Tensile 2 in.1 for sucker rod pin threads (TSRP) or to the configuration shown in Figure B. typically manufactured from bar stock in the as purchased condition.3. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.2. E.3.3 for polished rod pin threads (TPRP).3.3. E.2.2. Mechanical Property.2 Mechanical Properties Sinker bars.1 Chemical Composition Sinker bars shall conform to the chemical composition requirements listed in Table E.4 and the dimensions in Table B.2 Pin and Thread Type The pin and thread type for sinker bars shall conform to the configuration shown in Figure B.2.1 Chemical Analysis A chemical analysis shall be performed on each heat number of steel used in the manufacture of sinker bars. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. E. and Color Code Marking Requirements for Sinker Bars Yield.3. Copyright API.3 for the grade specified. in whole or in part. of Area minimum minimum maximum minimum minimum Color Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa ksi Mpa % % Code C carbon UNS G10XX or UNS G15XX Series Steel a 60 414 90 621 115 793 10 20 White K alloy UNS G43XX or UNS G46XX Series Steel a 60 414 90 621 115 793 10 20 Blue DC carbon UNS G10XX or UNS G15XX Series Steel a 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Brown 69 .

4 mm). conform to the following requirements. This document is not an API Standard. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DPS or set the gap gauge to assure DPS is within the minimum diameter.4. E. 70 . and molybdenum that totals a minimum of 1.4. Copyright API.4. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DPS or set the gap gauge to assure diameter.2. Caliper.8 mm) between support racks or tables and shall have all centers in the same plane. the product shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7. pin shoulder. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. (1828. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined below. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DEN or set the gap gauge to assure DEN is within the minimum diameter. Sucker rod pin threads (TSRP) and polished rod pin threads (TPRP) shall be inspected in accordance with B.4. a) Support racks and/or tables shall have contact surfaces that are non-abrasive to the sinker bar. DPS Micrometer.5. elevator neck DEN is within the maximum diameter. The maximum unsupported length of the product ends shall not be greater than 24 in.15% alloying content.2 Inspection Racks and/or Tables Supports for inspecting and testing sinker bars shall. DEN shall not be larger than the maximum diameter. E. If a non-conformance is found. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DEN or set the gap gauge to assure diameter.1 General Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented procedures. DPS shall not be larger than the maximum diameter. Table E. (152. as a minimum. in whole or in part.4 Dimensional Inspection Requirements E.3 Dimensional Inspection Sinker bars shall be inspected in accordance with Table E.4 – Dimensional Inspection of Sinker Bars Check For Gauge or Measuring Instrument a Procedure DEN b Micrometer. E. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. DA alloy UNS G41XX Series Steel a 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Yellow Special alloy shall be any chemical composition DS that contains a combination of nickel. 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Orange special alloy chromium. All rights reserved.4. DPS is within the maximum diameter. DPS shall not be smaller than the minimum diameter. DEN shall not be smaller than the minimum diameter. b) Support racks and/or tables for inspecting and testing processes shall not exceed 72 in. Caliper. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. a Or an equivalent international series number steel.

4 mm) wide. LEN shall not be shorter than the minimum length. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum width for WWF or set the gap gauge to assure WWF is within the minimum width. WWF shall not be larger than the maximum width. d Minimum length. b Elevator neck is optional with manufacturer. E. (304. Caliper. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LSE or set the gap gauge to assure LSE is within the minimum length. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum diameter for DSB or set the gap gauge to assure diameter. wrench flat is within the maximum width. Bends shall be measured by one of the following methods. 71 . b) A straight edge with a gauge length of 12. Bends may be straightened however kinks shall not. f The length of anvils on measuring instruments shall be equal to or exceed the width of the wrench square. shoulder to flat.4.58 mm) measured on one side. (152. LPF shall not be shorter than the minimum length. LWF shall not be shorter than the minimum length. The amount of the bend is the gap measured between the straight edge and the concave bar surface. The straight edge shall be held on the concave side of the bend.2 mm) and not greater than 0.1 Bends Bar stock and sinker bars shall be inspected for bends. (3. exclusive of radius.4 Straightness Requirements Bar stock and sinker bars shall be inspected for straightness. LSB shall not be longer than the length.00 in. minimum LPF Caliper or Gap Gauge Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LPF or set the gap gauge to assure LPF is length. (6. or Gap Gauge Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LSE or set the gap gauge to assure LSE is length. within the minimum length. The maximum allowable gap is 0. Copyright API.4. LSE shall not be longer than the maximum length. minimum LSB Tape Measure Maximum: measure to the maximum length for LSB. Runout values are twice the amount of the gap over the gauge length. LSE Micrometer. WWF shall not be smaller than the minimum width. The maximum allowable circular runout shall be 0. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. DSB shall not be larger than the maximum diameter. (1. sinker bar DSB is within the maximum diameter. LEN c Caliper or Gap Gauge Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LEN or set the gap gauge to assure LEN is length. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LSB. DSB Micrometer. sinker bar. wrench flat within the minimum length. a) Circular runout is measured on the bar surface at a distance (gauge length) of 6. Caliper. Caliper. LSE shall not be shorter than the minimum length.4. or Gap Gauge f Maximum: measure to the maximum width for WWF or set the gap gauge to assure WWF width.250 in. LSB shall not be shorter than the minimum length. c Minimum length. All rights reserved. elevator neck within the minimum length. maximum length. As a minimum. minimum WWF e Micrometer. in whole or in part. e Two wrench flats standard.130 in. four wrench flats optional with manufacturer. maximum and minimum Minimum: measure to the minimum diameter for DSB or set the gap gauge to assure DSB is within the minimum diameter. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. pin shoulder to elevator neck within the maximum length. a Anvils on measuring instruments shall not be less than 0. the length of the elevator neck shall safely accommodate the sucker rod elevator.4 mm) from a support. LWF d Caliper or Gap Gauge Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LWF or set the gap gauge to assure LWF is length. DSB shall not be smaller than the minimum diameter.125 in (3. This document is not an API Standard.30 mm).8 mm) shall be used to determine the maximum allowable bend.063 in. E.00 in. exclusive of fillets.

031 in. The amount of straightness shall be measured at the surface of the pin shoulder diameter. on one or both ends.4.250 in. This document is not an API Standard. The maximum allowable circular runout is 0.83 m) with the centers in the same plane. low stress permanent marking or any combination.4. E. End straightness shall be measured as follows.4 mm) from the pin shoulder to measure end straightness.0 ft (1.25 mm) nor greater than 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.5. (0. (152.130 in (3. The rest of the bar shall be supported at a maximum distance of 6. f) Nominal thread size (Table E. b) Standard. laser engraving. End straightness is measured via a dial indicator.1).34 mm) in any 60 in. forged. 11B c) Reference size (Table E. d) Grade (see Table E. (6. (152. E.0 in. the product identification markings on each end shall be complete.4 cm) section of the bar. with January represented as number 01.5 Marking Requirements Sinker bars shall be permanently and legibly marked prior to final acceptance. e) Thread type. laser or other comparable measuring device. a) Manufacturer’s name or mark.1 Product Identification Markings As a minimum. All rights reserved. If applied to both ends. The depth of the markings shall not be less than 0. h) The month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12 chronologically. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.79 mm). in any order. 72 . It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. at the option of the manufacturer. Copyright API.2 End Straightness Bar stock and sinker bars shall be inspected for end straightness. Cumulative and consecutive measurements for bends shall not exceed 0.010 in. (0. for sucker rod pin threads no addition markings. E. in whole or in part. Methods of markings shall include die stamped.1). for polished rod pin threads the addition of PR. A sinker bar without an elevator neck shall be supported at a distance of 6.3). A sinker bar with an elevator neck shall be supported within 1 in of transition of the elevator neck diameter (DEN) to the sinker bar body diameter (DSB). the following product identification markings shall be applied to the wrench flat(s). g) Heat code.30 mm).

This document is not an API Standard.1 External Thread Protectors External thread protectors shall be designed and installed to protect pin threads and contact faces from physical damage during handling.5. sinker bar manufactured in January of 2017 shall be marked as shown in Table E. E. h) The year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all sinker bars. 01 17 E. Grade C. E.6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sinker Bars with Polished Rod Threads Manufacturer’s Name or Nominal Thread Size and Mark Standard Reference Size Grade Thread Type Heat Code Month of Manufacture Year of Manufacture --.1. /4 TSRP. 11B 1 1/2 C PR 3/4 --. Table E.1 mm).5.6. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above.5. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. Copyright API. E.5 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sinker Bars with Sucker Rod Threads Manufacturer’s Name or Thread Type and Nominal Mark Standard Reference Size Grade Thread Size Heat Code Month of Manufacture Year of Manufacture --. in whole or in part.1 Example of Product Identification Markings 1 3 A reference size 1 /2 in.2 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings 73 . 11B 1 1/2 C 3/4 --. All rights reserved. E. transportation and storage. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. 01 17 Table E.2 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings which include the API Monogram and license number may be applied on the same or opposing wrench flats of the same end.6. (38. with 2017 represented as the number 17.

Note E.7. transportation and storage. ± 1 in. all pin surfaces shall be coated per E. d) Crosswise supports. according to the requirements in Table E. a) Prior to palletizing.6. b) The sinker bar diameter (DSB) shall be protected per E.6. from resting directly on a flat surface. (762 mm ± 25 mm) unless agreed to by purchase agreement.7.1 Machined Pin Surfaces A temporary atmospheric corrosion inhibitor thread storage compound shall be applied to machined pin surfaces prior to the installation of thread protectors. g) Crosswise supports. shall be clearly visible on at least one thread protector cap of every sinker bar.2.2. f) The maximum center-to-center distance down the length of the sinker bar for supports/spacers shall be equal to or less than 72 in. All rights reserved. in whole or in part. do not contact each other during transportation. Copyright API.2. E.4 Palletizing Sinker Bars Sinker bars shall be palletized to conform to the following requirements. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. E. The coating shall be applied before transportation of the sinker bars and shall be maintained during storage. (508 mm). h) Supports/spacers shall be provided such that rows of sinker bars or couplings.3. e) The maximum distance from the edge of a support/spacer to the end of the sinker bar (coupling. if installed) shall be 20 in. (1.6.2.2. elevator neck and machined pin surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling. if attached. A temporary protective coating shall be applied to the body.83 m). 74 .1. E.2 Non-machined Surfaces The manufacturer shall provide sinker bars with a hydrocarbon removable coating (HRC) applied to sinker bar diameter (DSB). HRCs that do not obscure manufacturer markings are preferred. spacers or blocks shall be provided along the bottom of each pallet and shall be of sufficient thickness as to prevent sinker bars or couplings. spacers and blocks shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the sinker bar. E.1 and thread protectors shall be installed per E. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. This document is not an API Standard. c) The width of a sinker bar pallet shall be 30 in.3 Color Codes Color codes.7.1: This compound shall be removed from the pin and an acceptable thread lubricant shall be applied before the coupling is made-up to assure adequate connection preload stress (see API 11BR). if attached.6.

1 General Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed for the handling.) shall be properly designed and rated per industry standards. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized sinker bars shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specification for transportation of the product. i) Sinker bars shall be placed between crosswise supports and spacers such that the ends of the supports and spacers extend beyond the sinker bars in the pallet. d) Un-palletized sinker bars shall be lifted and laid down individually.7. transportation and storage of all sinker bars. sinker bars shall be supported by at least two points to prevent bends.5. d) Palletized and un-palletized sinker bars shall not be lifted using chains. e) Crosswise supports.g. nylon straps. and/or contact faces. either by hand or with a handling and lifting device designed to support the sinker bar without causing damage. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. 75 . wires or when forklift tines contact the sinker bar. Care shall be exercised to prevent sinker bars from contacts which might cause nicks or damage to the threads by jamming of the thread protectors. bent. c) Palletized sinker bars shall be lifted and laid down as a single pallet with a handling and lifting device designed to support the sinker bars without causing damage. or nicked sinker bars are permanently damaged and shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7. E.. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products E. All rights reserved. state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed. as a single sinker bar. a) Care shall be exercised to prevent sinker bars from contacts which might cause damage to the body. and racks or sills shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the sinker bar. This document is not an API Standard. in whole or in part. E. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. c) During all handling. threads. E. Further. the sinker bars shall never be handled in such a manner as to produce a permanent kink or bend. cables. tee hooks. Copyright API. blocks.7. b) During all handling operations. Kinked. b) Sinker bars shall never be hammered on with metallic tools for any reason.7 Handling. spacers. transportation and storage operations. spreader bars. etc.3 Transportation Requirements for Finished Products a) All applicable federal.7. there shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized sinker bars for safe handling and easy access.2.2 Handling Requirements a) Handling and lifting devices (e. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. forklifts.

as required for removal of lifting devices.7. interlocked and limited in height so the stack is stable. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. The sinker bar layers shall be separated by spacers placed directly above a support rack or sill.4 Storage Requirements for Finished Products a) The storage of sinker bars shall not create hazards. Copyright API. one above the other. the outside sinker bars in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the sinker bars from rolling off the spacers. c) Palletized and un-palletized sinker bars shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transportation vehicle.2. Restraints shall not apply stress to sinker bars and shall be placed in such positions as to pass over crosswise supports. reference diameter. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. shall be blocked. Pin ends are provided with thread protectors.1). The sinker bars shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments. b) Sinker bars shall be separated and stored on support racks or sills according to grade. e) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. a support rack or sill shall be provided for each crosswise support in the pallet. the pin end should be assessed for damage. c) For palletized sinker bars. interlocked and limited in height so the layers are stable. Palletized sinker bars stored in stacks. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. nominal thread size.7. as required for removal of lifting devices. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent the sinker bars from contacting sinker bars in adjacent layers. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent the sinker bars from contacting adjacent layers. Whenever observed to be without such protection. d) For un-palletized sinker bars. shall be blocked. or impede the ingress and egress of traffic. placed directly under the crosswise supports of the pallet so the sinker bars themselves shall not be in contact with the blockage or the transportation vehicle. a suitable atmospheric corrosion inhibitor applied (see E. E. d) Transportation vehicles for handling palletized sinker bars shall be provided with blockage. Any rust on the sinker bar diameter (DSB) shall be removed with a wire brush and a suitable HRC applied (see E. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. f) Stored sinker bars shall be inspected at regular intervals. 76 .2).2. and the end supports shall be located approximately 12 in. (300 mm) from the ends of the sinker bars. the outside sinker bars in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the sinker bars from rolling off the spacers. (300 mm) from the ends of the sinker bars so the sinker bars themselves shall not be in contact with the transportation vehicle. The sinker bar layers shall be separated by spacers placed directly above the blockage. All rights reserved. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. a minimum of four support racks or sills shall be provided with the end supports located approximately 12 in.1) and thread protectors installed (see E. obstruct access to emergency equipment. in whole or in part. one above the other. The pallets shall be stacked so the crosswise supports of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet. This document is not an API Standard. If the spacers are not notched. If the spacers are not notched. The pallets in the stack shall be aligned so the crosswise supports of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet. Un-palletized sinker bars stored in layers. cleaned with a nonabrasive brush.7. e) Transportation vehicles for handling un-palletized sinker bars shall provide at least four blockages. thread type and length.7.

Copyright API. optional g) Quantity. if required.1). in whole or in part. sucker rod pin threads or polished rod pin threads (Table E. E. a) Reference size (Table E. d) Nominal thread size (Table E.1).1). outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. This document is not an API Standard. e) Thread type. f) Elevator neck. b) Length (Table E. c) Grade (see Table E.2). It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.8 Ordering Information The following general guidelines are suggested for ordering sinker bars.3). it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. 77 . h) Special packaging requirements. All rights reserved.

This document is not an API Standard.1 – NU Polished Rod Illustration 78 .1 Dimensional Requirements F.2. All rights reserved.1.2. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. F. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1. the dimensions shown in Table F.3. F. Figure F. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API.1 General Polished rods shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements in this Standard. in whole or in part.1 Non Upset (NU) Polished Rods NU polished rods shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure F.2 Design Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the design of polished rods. Annex F (normative) Polished Rods F.1 and the lengths shown in Table F.

02 1.125 3.000 0.1.000 25.2 External Upset (EU) Polished Rods EU polished rods shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure F. in whole or in part. b See Figure F. Copyright API. f Minimum 1. d There are two (2) choices for nominal thread size (SNT) for the 1 1/8 in.73 1. wrench flat Minimum 0.085 27.1. including fillets LST Maximum 1.75 length.250 31.505 38. This document is not an API Standard.56 1.75 1.00 0. NU nominal thread DNL Maximum 1.43 0.18 0. Table F.2. All rights reserved.844 21. e Minimum length. wrench flat WWF f Maximum 0.23 diameter.85 LPF Minimum 0.490 37.000 25.115 28.125 3.54 a The reference size is the nominal polished rod diameter (DPR). spray metal coating transition Minimum 0. mm in. c See Figure B.4.2.210 30. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.130 28.19 1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. F.70 1.75 1. the dimensions in Table F. pin shoulder to the start of the wrench flat. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.40 1.18 length. f Wrench flats optional with manufacture.2 – EU Polished Rod Illustration 79 . 1 1/4 in. Figure F. polished rod Minimum 1.88 1.250 31.281 32. Dimensional Element b in. (28.255 31.70 1.50 1.88 1.08 DPR Maximum 1.18 0.58 mm) NU polished rod.344 34.2 and the lengths in Table F.40 1.000 25.130 28.1 – Dimensions for NU Polished Rod Reference Size a 1 1/8 in.906 23. mm SNT c Reference 5/8 or 3/4 TPRP d 7/8 TPRP 1 TPRP size.00 0.250 31.3.32 1.4 for polished rod pin threads (T PRP).031 26.23 diameter. Table B. 1 1/2 in.255 31.00 LWF e.240 31. non-coated length (polished rods with spray metal coating – only) Minimum 1.460 37.61 1.000 0. mm in. exclusive of fillets.969 24.000 0.40 length.13 width.505 38.125 3.

00 LWF c Minimum 1.00 11023.00 4927. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.6 16 ft.125 3. Minimum 190.50 1.125 3.00 6756.240 31.255 31.6 11 ft. g See Figure B.56 1. This document is not an API Standard.0 80 . EU nominal thread Reference 3/4 or 7/8 TSRP 7/8 or 1 TSRP 1 or 1 1/8 TSRP size.00 0.00 3302. Table F.469 37.000 0.505 38. including fillets LST Maximum 1.31 a The reference size is the nominal polished rod diameter (DPR). Minimum 358.000 0.344 34.40 length.8 30 ft.70 1.28 length.3 – Customary Lengths for Polished Rods Dimensional Element a in.19 1. NU nominal thread Reference 5/8 or 3/4 TPRP 7/8 TPRP 1 TPRP DNL Maximum 1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.40 1.250 31. mm SNT e size. Table B.531 38.130 28. Table F. (31.2.000 25. mm LPR b.70 1. Table B.500 38.00 9194.61 1.115 28.73 1.2 for sucker rod pin threads (T SRP).13 1.23 diameter. All rights reserved.2 8 ft.000 0.1.00 7874.08 DPR Maximum 1.18 0.10 1.75 1. Minimum 130. Minimum 262.1 mm) EU polished rod.3 for polished rod pin threads (T PRP). mm in.0 Maximum 266.89 width.281 32.88 1.40 1.00 2387.54 1.2 Maximum 434.00 6654. mm in. wrench flat WWF d Maximum 1. Dimensional Element b in. b See Figure F.32 1.75 mm) and two choices of SNT for the upset end of the 1 1/2 in.6 26 ft.00 9093.8 Maximum 314.210 30.85 LPF Minimum 0.460 37.00 10922.000 25.0 Maximum 362.18 length.4.00 3403.23 diameter.2 – Dimensions for EU Polished Rods Reference Size a 1 1/8 in.00 0. Length of Polished Rod Minimum 94. e There are two (2) choices of nominal thread size (SNT) for the upset end and two (2) choices of SNT for the non-upset end of the 1 1/8 in. Copyright API. two choices of SNT for the upset end of the 1 1/4 in. 1 1/4 in.6 36 ft. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Minimum 430.625 41.88 1.00 2489.00 7975.58 mm).0 Maximum 194. in whole or in part. pin shoulder to the start of the wrench flat. (28.085 27. c Maximum 98.031 26.255 31. d Two (2) wrench flats on the non-upset end of the EU polished rod optional with manufacture. spray metal coating transition Minimum 0. exclusive of fillets. c Minimum length.505 38. wrench flat Minimum 0.6 Maximum 134.969 24.4 22 ft. f See Figure B. (38. polished rod Minimum 1.18 0.00 4826.125 3.490 37. 1 1/2 in.130 28. non-coated length (polished rods with spray metal coating – only) Minimum 1. Minimum 310.000 25.

F. (12.2. b The length of polished rods shall be measured from the outer end of the pin to the outer end of the pin.3. F.2.2.1.3 for polished rod pin threads (TPRP). All rights reserved.1. F.19 m) if so specified by the purchase order F.2 Mechanical Properties Polished rods shall conform to the mechanical property requirements listed in Table F.1 Mechanical Property Testing 81 .1 Chemical Analysis A chemical analysis shall be performed on each heat number of steel used in the manufacture of polished rods.4 and the dimensions in Table B.1 for sucker rod pin threads (T SRP) on the external upset end and the configuration shown in Figure B. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2.3.3 for the grade specified.00 12242. Copyright API.2. c Polished rods may be furnished in lengths greater than 40 ft. in whole or in part.2.2. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.3 for the grade specified.8 40 ft.2 and the dimensions in Table B. NU polished rods shall be manufactured and supplied with the same thread type and nominal thread size (SNT) on each end.2.3 for polished rod pin threads (TPRP) on the non-upset end. This document is not an API Standard.2.3. Maximum 482. Minimum 478. F.3.2 a See Figure F.1 Chemical Composition Polished rods shall conform to the chemical composition requirements in Table F.3 Material Requirements F.00 12141.1 NU Polished Rods The pin and thread type for NU polished rods shall conform to the configuration shown in Figure B.3. F.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.3.4 and the dimensions in Table B.2 Pin and Thread Type F.2 EU Polished Rods The pin and thread type for EU polished rods shall conform to the configuration shown in Figure B.

and Yes HSS molybdenum that total a minimum of 1. No DS 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Orange special chromium.15% alloying content.2 shall be an acceptable means to comply with this requirement provided there has been no subsequent heat treatment. No S3 Light Blue stainless Steel b S431 a UNS S431X0 Series 30 207 70 483 100 689 --. No S4 Red stainless Steel b C UNS G10XX or UNS No C 60 414 90 621 115 793 10 20 White carbon G15XX Series Steel b Yes CS K UNS G43XX or UNS No K 60 414 90 621 115 793 10 20 Blue alloy G46XX Series Steel b Yes KS DC UNS G10XX or UNS No DC 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Brown carbon G15XX Series Steel b Yes DCS DA UNS G41XX Series Steel No DA b 85 586 115 793 140 965 10 20 Yellow alloy Yes DAS Special alloy shall be any chemical composition that contains a DS combination of nickel. spray metal coating or other special processes requiring validation. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.2% offset Tensile 8 in. Copyright API. --. and Yes DSS molybdenum that total a minimum of 1. Elongation. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. F. All rights reserved. No S2 Silver stainless Steel b S316 a UNS S316X0 Series 30 207 70 483 100 689 --.3.4 – Grade. This document is not an API Standard. a Stainless steel polished rods are not recommended for spray metal coatings. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.069 10 20 Green alloy Yes HAS Special alloy shall be any chemical composition that contains a HS combination of nickel. --. c 8 inches for Type A and 2 inches for type B test specimens (see Annex M).2. / 2 in c of Area minimum minimum maximum minimum minimum Spray Product Color Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa ksi Mpa % % Metal Marking Code S304 a UNS S304X0 Series 30 207 70 483 100 689 --. No HS 115 793 140 965 155 1. HA UNS G41XX Series Steel No HA b 115 793 140 965 155 1. Chemical Composition.3 Spray Metal Coating Requirements 82 . Reduction 0. in whole or in part. Mechanical property testing for polished rods shall be performed in accordance with Annex N. Mechanical Property and Color Code Requirements for Polished Rods Yield.069 10 20 Purple special chromium. Table F. b Or an equivalent international series number steel.3.15% alloying content. --.

1 or F.g.05 Zirconium 0.1 Tightening a polished rod clamp on the spray metal portion of the polished rod can cause stress cracks in the spray metal that propagate into the base metal of the polished rod resulting in a premature failure of the polished rod.00 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.50 Phosphorus 0.4.50 Cobalt 0. Table F.00 Boron 2. The configuration and length of the spray metal coating shall be determined by the user/operator and shall be specified in the ordering agreement. LBTM for the bottom end of the polished rod to contain spray metal coating or LCTR for center of the polished rod to contain spray metal coating with each end containing a length of polished rod without spray metal coating).00 0. Examples of effective surface preparation procedures are specified in SSPC-SP 5/NACE No.02 Sulfur 0.2 to specify the location and length of the spray metal coating in the specified sections of the polished rod (e. F.05 Nickel Remainder F.5 – Spray Metal Coating Chemical Composition Weight Percent.3. This document is not an API Standard. Polished rods are available with the addition of a spray metal coating. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 1.3. (See Figure F.00 0.50 5.50 Iron 3. Elements minimum maximum Carbon 0.3.00 0. All rights reserved.00 18.00 0..50 4.00 5.00 0. Copyright API. F. or SSPC-SP 11.00 Silicon 3.3.05 Aluminum 0.02 Chromium 12. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. in whole or in part.10 Titanium 0.3.2 Base Metal Surface Preparation Base metal shall be prepared prior to the application of the spray metal coating in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented procedure to assure adequate bonding.1 Spray Metal Chemical Composition The chemical composition of the spray metal coating shall conform to Table F. Weight Percent. Polished rods with a spray metal coating shall be manufactured and supplied as end spray (LBTM). or center spray (LCTR). The spray metal coating shall not extend beyond the shoulder into the machined portion of the pin.3 Spray Metal Coating Thickness 83 .50 1.3. Note F.

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
Spray metal coating thickness shall be 0.008 in. to 0.020 in. (0.20 mm to 0.51 mm) per side, as verified by diameter
measurements before and after application of the coating, or by using a commercial thickness tester. The finished
dimensions of polished rods with spray metal coating shall conform to the requirements in F.3.3.5.

F.3.3.4 Hardness Testing of Spray Metal Coating

Polished rods with spray metal coating or spray metal test coupons shall be hardness tested using the Vickers micro
hardness procedure with a 200 gm load per ASTM E384 or equivalent Knoop hardness. Acceptance of hardness
testing shall be based on one production spray metal polished rod (or test coupon) per lot of powder used in the
coating process.

Spray metal coating hardness shall be 480 HV200 minimum.

F.3.3.5 Finished Diameter of Polished Rods with Spray Metal Coating

The finished diameter (DPR) of the spray metal coating length (LSMC) and the finished diameter of the non-coated
length (DNL) shall conform to Table F.1.

F.3.4 Color Code Marking Requirements

Polished rods shall conform to the color code requirements listed in Table F.3 for the grade specified.

F.4 Dimensional and Surface Finish Inspection Requirements

F.4.1 General

Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented
procedures. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined
below.

F.4.2 Inspection Racks and/or Tables

Supports for inspecting and testing polished rods shall, as a minimum, conform to the following requirements.

a) Support racks and/or tables shall have contact surfaces that are non-abrasive to the polished rod.

b) Support racks and/or tables for inspecting and testing processes shall not exceed 72 in. (1828 mm) between
support racks or tables and shall have all centers in the same plane. The maximum unsupported length of the
product ends shall not be greater than 24 in. (152.4 mm).

F.4.3 Dimensional Inspection

84

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
Polished rods shall be inspected in accordance with Table F.6. Polished rod pin threads (TPRP) and sucker rod pin
threads (TSRP) shall be inspected in accordance with B.4. If a non-conformance is found, the product shall be
dispositioned in accordance with 7.2.5.

Table F.6 – Dimensional Inspection of Polished Rods

Check For Gauge or Measuring Instrument a Procedure

DPR Micrometer, Caliper or Gap Gauge Maximum Diameter: Measure to the maximum diameter listed in Table F.1 or set the gap gauge to
diameter of polished rod, assure the polished rod body is within the maximum diameter. The gap gauge shall pass over the
maximum and minimum diameter of the polished rod body.

Minimum Diameter: Measure to the minimum diameter listed in Table F.1 or set the gap gauge to
assure the polished rod body is within the minimum diameter. The gap gauge shall not pass over the
diameter of the polished rod body.
LPR Tape Measure Maximum Length: Measure to the maximum length listed in Table F.1. The length of the polished rod
length of polished rod, shall not be longer.
maximum and minimum
Minimum Length: Measure to the minimum length listed in Table F.1. The length of the polished rod
shall not be shorter.
LWF b Caliper or Gap Gauge Minimum: measure to the minimum length for LWF or set the gap gauge to assure LWF is within the
length, wrench flat minimum length. LWF shall not be shorter than the minimum length.
minimum
WWF c Micrometer, Caliper, or Gap Gauge d Maximum: measure to the maximum width for WWF or set the gap gauge to assure WWF is within the
width, wrench flat maximum width. WWF shall not be larger than the maximum width.
maximum and minimum
Minimum: measure to the minimum width for WWF or set the gap gauge to assure WWF is within the
minimum width. WWF shall not be smaller than the minimum width.
a Anvils on measuring instruments shall not be less than 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) and not greater than 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) wide.
b Minimum length, exclusive of fillets.
c Two wrench flats standard, four wrench flats optional with manufacturer.
d The length of anvils on measuring instruments shall be equal to or exceed the width of the wrench square.

F.4.4 Straightness Requirements

Bar stock and polished rods shall be inspected for straightness. Bends may be straightened however kinks shall not.

F.4.4.1 Bends

Bar stock and polished rods shall be inspected for bends. Bends shall be measured by one of the following methods.

a) Circular runout is measured on the rod surface at a distance (gauge length) of 6.00 in. (152.4 mm) from a support.
Runout values are twice the amount of the gap over the gauge length. The maximum allowable circular runout shall
be 0.130 in. (3.30 mm).

b) A straight edge with a gauge length of 12.00 in. (304.8 mm) shall be used to determine the maximum allowable
bend. The straight edge shall be held on the concave side of the bend. The amount of the bend is the gap measured
between the straight edge and the concave rod surface. The maximum allowable gap is 0.063 in. (1.58 mm)
measured on one side.

85

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all
approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside
of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API
Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
Cumulative and consecutive measurements for bends shall not exceed 0.250 in. (6.34 mm) in any 60 in. (152.4 cm)
section of the rod.

F.4.4.2 End Straightness

Bar stock and polished rods shall be inspected for end straightness. End straightness shall be measured as follows.

Polished rods (upset or non-upset) shall be supported at a distance of 6.0 in. (152.4 mm) from the pin shoulder to
measure end straightness. The rest of the rod shall be supported at a maximum distance of 6.0 ft (1.83 m) with the
centers in the same plane. End straightness is measured via a dial indicator, laser or other comparable measuring
device. The amount of straightness shall be measured at the surface of the pin shoulder diameter.

The maximum allowable circular runout is 0.130 in (3.30 mm).

F.4.5 Surface Finish

Surface finish roughness of polished rods shall be checked with a surface finish gauge such as a profilometer or a
comparator. LSMC shall have a surface finish between 8 μin. (0.203 μm) and 32 μin. (0.813 μm) Ra.

F.4.5.1 Cracks

Cracks in the spray metal coating, detected by unaided visual inspection, shall be cause for rejection.

Micro-cracks in the spray metal coating, detected by aided visual inspection, shall not be cause for rejection.

F.4.5.2 Porosity

Porosity in the spray metal coating, detected by unaided visual inspection, shall be cause for rejection.

F.4.5.3 Pullback

Pullback in the spray metal coating, detected by unaided visual inspection, shall be cause for rejection.

F.5 Marking Requirements

Polished rods shall be permanently and legibly marked prior to final acceptance. Methods of markings shall include
die stamped, forged, laser engraving, low stress permanent marking or any combination, at the option of the
manufacturer. The maximum depth of the markings shall not be greater than 0.031 in. (0.79 mm).

An alternate marking to signify the top of the polished rod (LTOP), permanent markers, paint stenciling, tape or tag, or
any other semi-permanent method of marking to point of use shall be acceptable.

F.5.1 Product Identification Markings

As a minimum, the following product identification markings shall be applied, in any order, within 3 in. (76 mm) of the
pin shoulder, on one or both ends. If applied to both ends, the product identification markings on each end shall be
complete.
86

a) LTOP arrow (↑). 87 . h) Heat code.7 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Polished Rods Length and LTOP Manufacturer’s Nominal Thread Month of Year of Standard Reference Size Grade Location of Heat Code Arrow Name or Mark Size and Type Manufacture Manufacture Coating ↑ 7/8 SR x 7/8 PR --. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. j) The year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year. b) Manufacturer’s name or mark. in whole or in part.3. Grade DA. c) Standard.2.4. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. chronologically. g) Length and location of spray metal coating (optional).31 m). may be applied on the same or opposing wrench flats of the wrench flat or square.1 and F. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. C for center spray or E for end spray.1 Example of Product Identification Markings 1 A reference size 1 /4 in. with 16 ft (4. 11B 1 1/4 DAS 16 C --. see Table F.1 and F. with 2017 represented as the number 17.2 and thread type.75 mm) x 24 ft (7.88 m) center (LCTR) spray metal coating manufactured in January of 2017 shall be marked as shown in Table F.1. see Table F. e) Grade.3. i) The month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12. F. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. see F. This document is not an API Standard.7. f) Nominal thread size (SNT). (31. see Table F. 7/8 sucker rod pin thread (T SRP) x 7/8 polished rod pin thread (TPRP). All rights reserved. Table F.5.2 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.5. 11B d) Reference size. PR for polished rod pin thread and SR for sucker rod pin thread. with January represented as number 01. Copyright API. 01 17 Top F. which include the API Monogram and license number.

The manufacturer. or agent shall take necessary action to clean rust spots and repair damage in atmospheric protective coatings while the product is in storage.1 General Requirements a) Care shall be exercised to prevent polished rods from contacts which might cause damage to the polished rod. according to the requirements in Table F. cables. F. transportation and storage. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Copyright API. supplier. removable sleeve or tube to protect the polished rod diameter from physical damage during normal handling. transportation and storage of all polished rods.2 Atmospheric Corrosion Inhibitor Thread Storage Compound A protective coating shall be applied to the machined pin surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling. This document is not an API Standard. F.4. F. transportation and storage operations. transportation and storage. e) Crosswise supports.6. or agent shall inspect polished rods for visible signs of physical damage and corrosive attack. in whole or in part. All rights reserved.6. c) During all handling. F. supplier.6. 88 . outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. These coating shall be applied before transportation of the polished rods and shall be maintained during storage. F.7.4 Color Codes Color codes. d) Polished rods shall not be lifted using chains. there shall be sufficient clearance around polished rods for safe handling and easy access.1 Thread Protectors External thread protectors shall be designed and installed on each end of the polished rod to protect pins and pin threads from physical damage during normal handling. The manufacturer. shall be clearly visible on at least one thread protector cap of every polished rod.6. b) Polished rods shall never be hammered on with metallic tools for any reason.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of polished rods. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. spacers. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products The following general requirements shall be followed for the handling. wires or when forklift tines contact the product. F. transportation and storage.7 Handling. A label shall be provided on the removable sleeve or tube to identify the product. F. blocks and racks or sills shall be of a material that is non-damaging to the polished rods.3 Polished Rod Diameter The manufacturer shall provide a non-damaging.

state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. d) Un-palletized polished rods shall be lifted and laid down individually. Care shall be exercised to prevent polished rods from contacts which might cause nicks or damage to the threads by jamming of the thread protectors. polished rods shall be supported by two or more points to prevent excessive bends.2. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized polished rods shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specification for transportation of the product. 89 . as required for the removal of lifting devices. in whole or in part.) shall be properly designed and rated per industry standards. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent the polished rods from contacting adjacent layers. or nicked polished rods are permanently damaged and shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7. and the end supports shall be located approximately 12 in. as required for the removal of lifting devices. the outside polished rods in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the polished rods from rolling off the spacers. spreader bars.7. This document is not an API Standard. forklifts. d) Transport vehicles for handling palletized polished rods shall be provided with blockage. nylon straps. (300 mm) from the polished rod ends so the polished rods themselves shall not be in contact with the transport vehicle. polished rods shall never be handled in such a manner as to produce a permanent kink or bend. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Kinked.3 Transportation Requirements for Finished Products a) All applicable federal. or impede ingress and egress traffic. F. placed directly under the crosswise supports of the pallet so the polished rods themselves shall not be in contact with the blockage or transport vehicle. obstruct access to emergency equipment. as a single polished rod.. If the spacers are not notched. The polished rod layers shall be separated by spacers placed directly above the blockage. bent.7. either by hand or with a handling and lifting device designed to support the polished rod without causing damage.g. etc. F. The pallets shall be stacked so the crosswise supports of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet. e) Transport vehicles for handling un-palletized polished rods shall provide at least four blockages.7. Copyright API. tee hooks. All rights reserved. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. F. Further.4 Storage Requirements for Finished Products a) The storage of polished rods shall not create hazards. c) Palletized and un-palletized polished rods shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transport vehicle. b) During all handling operations.2 Handling Requirements a) Handling and lifting devices (e. Restraints shall not apply stress to the polished rods and shall be placed in such positions as to pass over crosswise supports. c) Palletized polished rods shall be lifted and laid down as a single pallet with a handling and lifting device designed to support the polished rods without causing damage.5.

b) Polished rods shall be separated and stored on support racks or sills according to the grade. F. Whenever observed to be without such protection.SR). a support rack or sill shall be provided for each crosswise support in the pallet. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. f) Optional wrench flats. one above the other. d) For un-palletized polished rods. a suitable atmospheric corrosion inhibitor applied (see F. The spacers shall be thick enough to prevent polished rods from contacting polished rods in adjacent layers. f) Stored polished rods shall be inspected at regular intervals. The polished rods shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments.7. The polished rods in each layer shall be separated by spacers placed directly above a support rack or sill. 90 . If the spacers are not notched. a minimum of four support racks or sills shall be provided with the end supports located approximately 12 in. g) Quantity. self- supporting and secure against sliding or collapse.PR or upset . the pin end should be assessed for damage. cleaned with a nonabrasive brush. c) Pin Size and Type (non-upset . Un-palletized polished rods stored in layers. one above the other. All rights reserved. Polished rod diameters are proved with removable protective sleeves or tubes.1) and thread protectors installed (see C. e) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. the polished rod diameter should be assessed for damage.7.8 Ordering Information Suggestions for ordering polished rods are as follows: a) Size (nominal outside diameter). Copyright API. The pallets in the stack shall be aligned so the crosswise supports of the upper pallet are in vertical alignment with the crosswise supports of the lower pallet. e) Length and location of sprayed metal. b) Length. shall be blocked. c) For palletized polished rods. d) Grade. end spray (L1 or L3) or center spray (L2). Whenever observed to be without such protection. if applicable. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. cleaned with a nonabrasive brush.1).7. interlocked and limited in height so the stack is stable. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. (300 mm) from the ends of the polished rod. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. Pin ends are provided with thread protectors. Palletized polished rods stored in stacks. the outside polished rods in each layer shall be chocked to prevent the polished rods from rolling off the spacers. shall be blocked. size and length of the polished rod.3). and a protective sleeve or tube applied (see F. interlocked and limited in height so the layers are stable. one or both ends.

in whole or in part. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 Dimensional Requirements Couplings and sub-couplings shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure G.1 for full size or Table G. Copyright API. 91 .2 Design Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the design of couplings and sub-couplings. G. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2. All rights reserved. Annex G (normative) Couplings and Sub-couplings G.2 for slim hole couplings and sub-couplings.1 General Couplings and sub-couplings shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements in this Standard. G. This document is not an API Standard.1 and the dimensions in Table G. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.

This document is not an API Standard. polished rod box thread d 5/8 TPRB 3/4 TPRB 7/8 TPRB 1 TPRB 1 1/8 TPRB Reference --. 1 in.062 103.97 1. 3/4 in. coupling and sub-coupling Minimum 1.17 4.062 103.42 2. in whole or in part. Dimensional Element b in. e 7/8 TPRB x 5/8 TPRB 1 TPRB x 3/4 TPRB 1 1/8 TPRB x 7/8 TPRB DCS f Maximum 1.495 37. mm SNT size.68 2. Figure G.1 – Sucker Rod Coupling.182 55. All rights reserved.380 60. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.802 45.505 38. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.630 41.062 103.90 2.40 1. 1 1/8 in.562 h 115.23 1. mm in.17 4. mm in. 3/4 TPRB x 5/8 TPRB 7/8 TPRB x 3/4 TPRB 1 TPRB x 7/8 TPRB 1 1 /8 TPRB x 1 TPRB size. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.15 2.17 g 4.15 1. mm in.45 diameter. sucker rod box thread c 5/8 TSRB 3/4 TSRB 7/8 TSRB 1 TSRB 1 1/8 TSRB size.87 h 92 .620 41.192 55. Polished Rod Coupling and Sub-coupling Illustration Table G. sub-coupling box thread d.062 g 103. mm in.370 60.1 – Dimensions for Full Size Couplings and Sub-couplings Reference Size a 5/8 in. 7/8 in.17 4.817 46. Copyright API.20 LCS f Maximum 4.

Sucker rod couplings shall be manufactured and supplied with the same thread type and nominal thread size (SNT) in each end.17 4.17 g 4. sub-coupling box thread d.850 46. Table B.2. e --.2 for sucker rod box threads (TSRB).062 (128. length.30 DWF i Maximum 1. mm SNT size. the diameter (DCS) and the length (LCS) shall be determined by the largest nominal thread size (SNT) g For 1 in.57 mm) maximum and 5.5 for polished rod box threads (T PRB). 7/8 in. Table B.75 1. b See Figure G.2.88 1.75 Length of Wrench Flats a The reference size for couplings and sub-couplings is the reference size for the nominal sucker rod body.245 31.60 4.1 Sucker Rod Couplings The box and thread type for sucker rod couplings shall conform to the configuration in Figure B.3. Polished rod couplings shall be manufactured and supplied with the same thread type and nominal thread size (SNT) in each end. Table B. c See Figure B.. i Wrench flats on full size couplings and sub-couplings optional with manufacturer. Dimensional Element b in. 1 in. (25.2 for sucker rod box threads (TSRB).5.4 mm) sub-couplings the length (LCS) shall equal 4.62 1. Copyright API.00 mm) minimum.000 101.125 53.495 37.250 31.562 (115. e For sub-couplings.2.28 1.1. mm in.64 1.75 1.97 1. f For sub-couplings.062 103. polished rod box thread d Reference 5/8 TPRB 3/4 TPRB 7/8 TPRB 1 TPRB size.100 53.250 31. 7/8 x 3/4. Table B.99 2.2.98 Distance Between Wrench Flats Minimum 1. e For sub-couplings.000 101.60 a The reference size for couplings and sub-couplings is the reference size for the nominal sucker rod body.3 and dimensions in Table B. c See Figure B.60 4.505 38. coupling and sub-coupling Minimum 4.562 (115. d See Figure B.250 31. b See Figure G.3 for sucker rod box threads (T SRB).000 (127. h For 1 1/8 in.2. 1 1/8 x 1.005 50.47 1.58 mm) sub-couplings the length (LCS) shall equal 5.15 1.. the thread size (SNT) shall be limited to one change in size (e.30 mm) minimum. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. the nominal thread size (SNT) shall be limited to one change in nominal thread size (e.000 101. f For sub-couplings. the diameter (DCS) and the length (LCS) shall be determined by the largest nominal thread size (SNT) g For 1 in.60 4.000 (127.500 (114. This document is not an API Standard. or 3/4 x 5/8). Table G.875 47.620 41. All rights reserved. 93 . mm in.500 38. h For 1 1/8 in.000 101. 3/4 in.250 31. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.60 4.75 1.3.000 101.500 114. coupling and sub-coupling Minimum 1.57 mm) maximum and 5. 3/4 TPRB x 5/8 TPRB 7/8 TPRB x 3/4 TPRB 1 TPRB x 7/8 TPRB DCS f Maximum 1.60 4.93 1.5.g.23 1. G.40 2.5 and dimensions in Table B.1.2 Polished Rod Couplings The box and thread type for polished rod couplings shall conform to the configuration in Figure B. d See Figure B.17 h length.00 mm) minimum.4 mm) sub-couplings the length (LCS) shall equal 4. 1 x 7/8. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.350 34.60 4. 1 1/8 x 1.255 31.30 mm) minimum.062 (128.000 101.2 – Dimensions for Slim Hole Couplings and Sub-couplings Reference Size a 5/8 in.58 mm) sub-couplings the length (LCS) shall equal 5.2 Box and Thread Type G.4 for polished rod box threads (TPRB). (25.63 2.375 34.29 1.625 41.67 LCS Maximum 4. or 3/4 x 5/8).000 101.600 40. (28.000 101. (28. sucker rod box thread c 5/8 TSRB 3/4 TSRB 7/8 TSRB 1 TSRB size.10 1. 7/8 x 3/4. 1 x 7/8.062 g 103.630 41.87 mm) maximum and 4.250 31.4 for polished rod box threads (TPRB).g.60 4.062 103.75 1.062 h 103.93 diameter.87 mm) maximum and 4. coupling and sub-coupling Minimum 4.34 LWF i Minimum 1.995 50. mm in.500 (114. G.17 4.475 37. in whole or in part.

All rights reserved.2. This document is not an API Standard. This analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM A751. G.2. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6.3.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement. or other special processes requiring validation. in whole or in part. The difference in nominal thread size (S NT) shall be limited to two changes in nominal thread size (SNT).1 Chemical Analysis A chemical analysis shall be performed on each heat number of steel used in the manufacture of couplings and sub- couplings.2. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. G. G. G.2 shall be an acceptable means to comply with this requirement provided there has been no subsequent heat treatment. spray metal coating.3 Sub-couplings The box and thread type for sub-couplings shall conform to the configuration in Figure B.3. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.3.2 Mechanical Properties Couplings and sub-couplings shall conform to the mechanical property requirements in Table G.05% and conform to the chemical composition requirements in Table G.3.3. spray metal coating.2.1 Mechanical Property Testing Mechanical property testing for couplings and sub-couplings shall be per ASTM A370. Copyright API.5 and dimensions in Table B.3 Material Requirements G. couplings and sub- couplings shall require testing of each batch lot to ASTM A370 to ensure compliance to this Standard. or other special processes requiring validation occur. 94 . G. If heat treatment. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6.3 for the grade specified.1 Chemical Composition Couplings and sub-couplings shall have a maximum sulfur content of 0.1.2.3 for the grade specified. G.2. the manufacturer can elect to use a correlation of the hardness testing as proof of compliance to this Standard.3.2 Hardness Correlation of Mechanical Properties If a Manufacturer develops a correlation between hardness and the mechanical properties of a finished product as part of the design package for a grade and series of steel.3. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.3.5 for polished rod box threads (T PRB).2. Sub-couplings shall be manufactured and supplied with the same thread type and different nominal thread size (SNT) in each end.2.

Each sample shall be taken from separate heat lots that represent the acceptable range of chemical compositions as specified by the manufacturer for that material type and grade of coupling or sub- coupling. or other special processes. heat treatment. or other special processes using the hardness testing procedure for the material type and grade per as determined by the manufacturer.1: Hardness test indications are not detrimental to the product if the raised metal is carefully dressed off. See Figure G. per material type and grade of coupling or sub-coupling produced by a manufacturer to ensure compliance to this Standard. steel series. Copyright API. spray metal coating. NOTE G. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2 –Hardness Determination of Base Metal Each initial correlation between hardness and mechanical properties shall require a minimum of 10 tests per grade and associated series of steel. 1 Hardness Tester Penetrator 2 Anvil or Table 3 Sprayed Metal Coating 4 Mid-point (approximate) 5 Exposed Base Metal Figure G. All rights reserved. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. When a correlation of the hardness testing is elected to verify the mechanical properties of couplings and sub- couplings. Correlations require validation when changing supplier. This document is not an API Standard. in whole or in part. the tests shall be performed after the completion of heat treatment.2. 95 . spray metal coating. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.

3.00 Silicon 3.50 4.00 0.3. Table G.00 0. in whole or in part.4 – Spray Metal Coating Chemical Composition Minimum Mass Maximum Mass (weight) (weight) Elements % % Carbon 0.05 Aluminum 0. This document is not an API Standard.50 1. Chemical Composition.10 Titanium 0.50 Iron 3.3 Spray Metal Coating Requirements Couplings and sub-couplings shall be manufactured and supplied with or without spray metal coating.068 Special nickel.00 0. Copyright API. G.50 Phosphorus 0.00 0.1 Spray Metal Chemical Composition The chemical composition of the spray metal coating shall conform to Table G.3. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.00 0.50 5.15% alloying content. UNS G41XX.2 Base Metal Surface Preparation 96 .02 Sulfur 0.00 18. G.00 5.05 Nickel Remainder G. TA UNS G51XX or No TA 60 414 95 655 125 862 Alloy Yes TAS UNS G86XX Series Steel a Special alloy shall be any chemical TS composition that contains a combination of No TS 60 414 95 655 125 862 Special nickel.068 Alloy Yes HAS UNS G86XX Series Steel a Special alloy shall be any chemical HS composition that contains a combination of No HS 80 552 125 862 155 1.3.3 – Grade. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. HA UNS G51XX or No HA 80 552 125 862 155 1. chromium and molybdenum that totals a Yes TSS minimum of 1.00 Boron 2. Mechanical Properties and Product Marking for Couplings and Sub-couplings 1 2 3 4 5 6 Yield. 0. All rights reserved.4. chromium and molybdenum that totals a Yes HSS minimum of 1.02 Chromium 12.3.05 Zirconium 0. Table G.50 Cobalt 0. a Or an equivalent international series number steel.00 0. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2% Offset Tensile minimum minimum maximum Spray Product Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa ksi Mpa Metal Marking TC UNS G10XX or No TC 60 414 95 655 125 862 Carbon UNS G15XX Series Steel a Yes TCS UNS G41XX.15% alloying content.

it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.3. The finished dimensions of couplings and sub-couplings with spray metal coating shall conform to the requirements in Table G. Testing shall be by the Vickers micro-hardness procedure with a 200 g load in accordance with ASTM E384 or equivalent Knoop hardness with Va dimension (see Figure G.003 in.2 for slim hole couplings and sub-couplings.51 mm) per side. Examples of effective surface preparation procedures are specified in SSPC-SP 5/NACE No.3) being 0. G.3. or on one coupling or sub-coupling per 5. as verified by diameter measurements before and after application of the coating or by using a commercial thickness tester. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard.1 for full size couplings and sub-couplings or Table G. to 0.3. Base metal shall be prepared prior to the application of the spray metal coating in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented procedure to assure adequate bonding.013 in. to 0.3 Spray Metal Coating Thickness Spray metal coating thickness shall be 0. Figure G. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. (0. or on one coupling or sub-coupling per lot of coating.000 products.08 mm to 0.33 mm). G. 1 or SSPC-SP 11. and shall cover the coupling or sub-coupling diameter (DCS) to the contact face major diameter (DBS). Copyright API. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.3.4 Hardness Testing of Spray Metal Coating Hardness testing of spray metal coating shall be performed on a minimum of one sprayed metal test coupon per lot of coating. (0.000 products. Spray metal coating hardness shall be 595 HV200 minimum.010 in. All rights reserved.020 in.25 mm to 0.3 – Vickers Micro-hardness Determination of Spray Metal Coating 97 . 1 Spray Metal Coating 2 Base Metal 3 Mid-thickness 4 Coating Thickness Va Measurement between successive indentations during a hardness test. or on one sprayed metal test coupon per 5.

If a non-conformance is found.125 in. between the face mm) flat feeler gauge of the gauge and the product contact face.4. D2 Minimum diameter: Measure to dimension as listed in Table F.4. (0. Maximum diameter (coupling OD): Measure to dimension as listed in Table F.2 Inspection Racks and/or Tables Support racks and/or tables for inspecting and testing shall have contact surfaces that are non-abrasive to the coupling or sub-coupling.4 Dimensional Inspection G. caliper or gap gauge Minimum diameter (coupling OD): Measure to dimension as listed in maximum and minimum Table F. maximum B6 No-go coupling thread plug The B6 plug shall not enter the product box threads more than the third (oversize) gauge full turn of the assembly.2 plus the allowable (+) tolerance or set gap gauge to assure product dimension is within the specified tolerance.5. minimum L Micrometer.2 minus the allowable (-) tolerance or set gap gauge to assure product dimension is within the specified tolerance.1 minus the allowable (-) tolerance or set gap gauge to assure product dimension is within the specified tolerance. caliper or gap gauge Minimum diameter: Measure to applicable dimension DQ or D3. G. Table G. Tables maximum and minimum F.5. G. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. The gap gauge OD shall pass over the coupling diameter. The B4 plug cone gauge shall enter the product box threads to cone Box cones B4 coupling plug cone gauge and contact.1 plus the 98 .1 and F.5 – Dimensional Inspection of Sucker Rod Couplings.1 plus the allowable (+) tolerance or set gap gauge to assure product dimension is within the specified tolerance. B2 Go coupling thread plug The B2 plug gauge shall enter the product box threads to the contact Coupling face parallelism gauge and a 0.54 mm) and not more than sub-couplings only) 0. G.1 General Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented procedures.150 in. The gap gauge shall not pass into the counterbore or if measuring D3 it shall not pass DQ and D3 inside the coupling face. outside diameter. Threads. The gap gauge shall pass into the counterbore or if measuring D 3 it shall pass inside the coupling face. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.4. Micrometer. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined below. caliper or gap gauge Maximum length: Measure to dimension listed in Table F. Maximum diameter: Measure to applicable dimension DQ or D3.2. Micrometer. Sucker rod box threads (T SRB) and polished rod box threads (TPRB) shall be inspected in accordance with B.002 in.3 Dimensional Inspection Couplings and sub-couplings shall be inspected in accordance with Table G. The diameter. The gap gauge shall not pass over the coupling diameter. Tables F. Copyright API. diameter of box counterbore. Micrometer.1 and F.051 face. in whole or in part.4. (3. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.81 mm). caliper or gap gauge diameter shall be equal to or greater than the listed dimension. the product shall be dispositioned in accordance with 7. When so engaged. at any point. the standoff of the gauge from the box (polished rod couplings and a caliper or gap gauges face shall be not less than 0. minimum B2 Go coupling thread plug The B2 plug gauge shall enter the product box threads to the contact (undersize) gauge face. All rights reserved. (2. The feeler gauge shall not enter.1. This document is not an API Standard. Polished Rod Couplings and Sub-couplings Gauge or Check For Measuring Instrument Procedure Threads.

detected by unaided visual inspection. G. The surface finish roughness of the spray metal coating on the coupling or sub-coupling diameter (DCS) shall not be rougher than 63 μin. G. Micro-cracks in the spray metal coating. Copyright API.4. allowable (+) tolerance or set gap gauge to assure product length is maximum and minimum within specified tolerance. detected by unaided visual inspection.1 minus the allowable (-) tolerance or set gap gauge to assure product dimension is within the specified tolerance. and not detrimental to the functionality of couplings and sub-couplings.4.4 Surface Finish Roughness The surface finish roughness of the coupling or sub-coupling diameter (DCS) shall not be rougher than 125 μin.2. G. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. detected by aided visual inspection.5. Minimum length: Measure to dimension listed in Table F. The surface finish roughness of the contact face major diameter (D BS) shall not be rougher than 125 μin (3. in whole or in part.4. or any combination. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Product identification markings shall be permanent. This document is not an API Standard. shall be cause for rejection.4.4. G. laser etch. (0.1 Product Identification Markings 99 . length. detected by unaided visual inspection. legible.1.1 Cracks Cracks in the spray metal coating. (3.175 μm) Ra.4.51 mm). at the option of the manufacturer.4. All rights reserved. low stress stamps. shall be cause for rejection.4. G. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2 Porosity Porosity in the spray metal coating. The requirement for surface finish roughness shall not apply to the coupling or sub-coupling radius or chamfer (RCS) between the diameter (DCS) and the contact face major diameter (DBS). An example of rejectable porosity is shown in Figure O. shall not be cause for rejection.020 in. G. An example of rejectable pullback is shown in Figure O.4.4 Surface Finish G. (1. Methods of markings shall include dot matrix.587 μm) Ra. The depth of the markings shall not be greater than 0.3 Pullback Pullback in the spray metal coating.175 μm) Ra. shall be cause for rejection.5 Marking Requirements Couplings and sub-couplings shall be marked prior to final acceptance.

in any order. 11B 7/8 F TA --. Copyright API. Table G. Table G. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. G. full size diameter. full size (F) or slim hole (S) f) Grade.1 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings which include the API Monogram and license number may be applied. Note G. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. If applied on the box counterbore or inside chamfer to both ends the markings shall be complete and include all required information shown below in a) through j).5. a) Polished rod couplings and sub-couplings shall be marked with the letters “PR” in front of the manufacturer’s name or mark. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Do not mark for sucker rod couplings. c) Standard.5.6. Table G. product identification markings on the inner diameter of couplings and sub-couplings may provide long term traceability prior to and after field installation. b) Manufacturer’s name or mark. Marking locations can be specified in the purchasing agreement. Grade TA sucker rod coupling manufactured in January of 2017 shall be marked as shown in Table G. j) The year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year. 01 17 100 . with 2017 represented as the number 17.2 Column 2 e) Diameter.3 Column 5 h) Heat code i) The month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12 chronologically. Table G. All rights reserved.22 mm) reference size. (22. G. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. with January represented as number 01. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2 In theory.3 Column 1 g) Do not mark for non-spray metal coated or mark with an S for spray metal coated.2 Example of Product Identification Markings for Sucker Rod Couplings 7 A /8 in. 11B d) Reference size. box counterbore or inside chamfer.6 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sucker Rod Couplings Spray Type Manufacturer’s Name or Mark Standard Reference Size Diameter Grade Metal Heat Code Month of Manufacture Year of Manufacture --.1.1 Column 2 or Table G. Product identification markings shall be applied. to couplings and sub-couplings on the outer diameter. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard.

8.5.8 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Sub-couplings Manufacturer’s Name or Reference Spray Heat Month of Year of Type Mark Standard Size Diameter Grade Metal Code Manufacture Manufacture PR --. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all couplings and sub- couplings. Table G. (22. transportation and storage.6.6. Anti-galling treatments shall reduce the galling tendency during makeup of couplings. Table G. (19. in whole or in part.2 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings A temporary protective coating shall be applied to the outer diameter of couplings and sub-couplings to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling. pony rods. Copyright API. G. slim hole diameter.7.3 Packaging Requirements for Couplings and Sub-couplings 101 . slim hole diameter. Grade TA polished rod coupling manufactured in January of 2017 shall be marked as shown in Table G. 11B 7/8 x 3/4 S TA S --. G. G. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.4 Example of Product Identification Markings for Sub-couplings 7 3 A /8 in.05 mm) reference size.22 mm) reference size.7 – Example of Product Identification Markings for Polished Rod Couplings Spray Type Manufacturer’s Name or Mark Standard Reference Size Diameter Grade Metal Heat Code Month of Manufacture Year of Manufacture PR --. G. These coatings shall be applied before transportation of couplings and sub-couplings and shall be maintained during storage. Its use shall not affect the final acceptable dimensional requirements. This document is not an API Standard.1 Anti-galling Treatment An anti-galling treatment shall be applied to the inner diameter of all couplings and sub-couplings in accordance with the manufacturer’s written specifications. 11B 7/8 S TA --.22 mm) x /4 in. All rights reserved. (22. or polished rods.6. Grade TA sub-coupling with spray metal coating manufactured in January of 2017 shall be marked as shown in Table G. 01 17 G.5.3 Example of Product Identification Markings for Polished Rod Couplings 7 A /8 in. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. sucker rods. 01 17 G.

All rights reserved. b) There shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized couplings and sub-couplings for easy access and safe handling. the product shall be accessed for damage. interlocked and limited in height so the tier or stack is stable. c) Packaged couplings and sub-couplings shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transport vehicle. G. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse.1 General Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed for the handling.1) shall be applied to the inner diameter of the coupling or sub-coupling. transportation and storage. Couplings and sub-couplings shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments. a) During all handling. transportation and storage operations. one above the other. care shall be exercised to prevent couplings and sub- couplings from contacts which might cause damage to the coupling or sub-coupling. b) Couplings and sub-couplings shall be separated and stored on support racks or pallets according to the type. diameter and grade of coupling or sub-coupling.3 Storage Requirements a) The storage of couplings and sub-couplings shall not create hazards. shall be blocked. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products G.7 Handling.6. 102 . c) Packaged couplings and sub-couplings stored in tiers or stacks. d) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. G. contact face or threads.7.7. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. a suitable temporary protective coating (see G. Copyright API. state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed. Couplings and sub-couplings shall be packaged according to the manufacturer’s requirements such that the couplings or sub-couplings will not be damaged during handling. or impede ingress and egress traffic. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2 Transportation Requirements a) All applicable federal. b) The height and weight of packaged couplings and sub-couplings shall not exceed the manufacturer’s written specifications for transportation of the product. Rust shall be removed with a nonabrasive brush.2) shall be applied to the outer diameter and contact face and an anti-galling treatment (see G.7. G. transportation and storage of all couplings and sub-couplings.6. reference size. e) Stored couplings and sub-couplings shall be inspected at regular intervals. This document is not an API Standard. in whole or in part. obstruct access to emergency equipment.

9) Thread Gauge Specification for Sucker Rod and Polished Rod Connections (Informative H. d) Grade. Table G. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Annex H (Normative H.1 for full size couplings or sub-couplings or Table G.1 – H. Table G. g) Specific requirements for marking location. a) Type.8 Ordering Information The following general guidelines are suggested for ordering couplings and sub-couplings. polished rod coupling or sub-coupling.3 Column 1.10 . b) Reference size. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Table G. in whole or in part.2 for slim hole couplings or sub- couplings. sucker rod coupling.13) Reference Master Gauges 103 . outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.H. G. e) Spray metal coated or non-spray metal coated.3 Column 5 f) Quantity. Copyright API. All rights reserved. full size (F) or slim hole (S). This document is not an API Standard. c) Diameter.

2. 104 .10. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Reference master gauges shall be submitted to one of the certifying agencies listed in section H. The permissible taper shall be back taper (larger diameter at entering end) and shall be confined within the pitch diameter limits. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. H. except as otherwise indicated. Gauge tolerances encroach on the product tolerance.1 and defined in Table B. Reference Master Gauges are required for products listed in Annex I and J that are not covered in this Annex. F and G.2 Design Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the design of gauges.1.2 Threads Per Inch The threaded portion shall be ten threads per inch (four threads per centimeter) and are based on the unified thread form with Class 2A-2B tolerances and allowances.00015 in. Copyright API. in whole or in part. H.2. Note The basic sizes of thread elements of working and reference master gauges are identical with those of the product. The requirements for the Reference Master Gauges used for these products are listed in API 5B and 5B.1. For this reason. it is theoretically possible for one gauge to accept and another to reject a given product thread. H.0038 mm) over the length P7LS.9. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Reference master gauges are required only for pin cone and box cone connections in Annex E.1. and P7) and thread plug gauges (B2 and B6) shall not exceed 0.4 Hardening Gauges shall be hardened to a minimum of HRC 55 or equivalent hardness on a superficial scale and shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances given in Table H. H. as defined in ANSI/ASME B1. All rights reserved.1 General This annex applies to the manufacturing of gauges required for products specified in Annexes C through G. provided such gauge can be shown to be within the limits specified. Working thread gauges shall be calibrated according to the requirements provided in Annex M and used as outlined in Annexes C through G.2.1 through H. H. ±2 °F (1 °C).5 Taper Pitch diameter taper of setting plug gauges (P1. (0. H. H. the owner of the gauges in question shall furnish proof regarding compliance.3 Dimensions All dimensions shall be in inches at 68 °F (20 °C). P5. In case of dispute.2. therefore.1 Thread Form The thread form shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure B. A manufacturer of products listed in Annexes C through G shall own or have access to the required product working thread gauges.2. This document is not an API Standard. a product thread passing any working gauge shall be considered acceptable.

105 .3 Sucker Rod Pin Connections H.7 Construction Cone ring gauges used on polished rod pin connections shall only be of the solid type (non-adjustable).2. The root form of the go and no-go thread ring gauges shall be of sufficient depth to clear the maximum major diameter of the full form setting plug after the gauge has been properly set. The major diameter of no-go thread ring gauges shall be cleared by a clearance cut of substantially P/4 width and approximately central. All rights reserved. H. H.3.2. 2) checking the shoulder squareness of the P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge. Copyright API.1. either by an extension of the sides of the thread toward a sharp V or by an undercut no greater than P/8 maximum width and approximately central. H.6 Precision Centers Go plug gauges (P1.1 and the dimensions in Table H. It is used in 1) setting the P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge.8 Root Form The minor diameter of thread plug gauges and setting plug gauges shall be cleared beyond a P/8 width of flat. H. in whole or in part.2.10 Helix Angle The helix angle correction shall be disregarded in all pitch diameter determinations. P7. This document is not an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. The major diameter of go thread ring gauges shall be cleared by a clearance cut of substantially P/8 width and approximately central. H. and 3) for detecting wear. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. and B2) and cone plug gauges (P3 and B4) shall have precision centers to permit measurement of runout of shoulder face and eccentricity of cone.1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge. H.9 Blunt Start The partial threads of both ends of all gauges and the junction of the full and truncated portions of setting plugs shall be removed to a blunt start except at the entering end of P4 and B3 ring gauges and the counterbore end of P2 and P8 ring gauges where a blunt start would be undesirable or impractical.2. P7 P7 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H. Go and no- go ring gauges may be either solid or adjustable. This gauge represents the maximum permissible pitch diameter and major diameter of the pin thread. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2.

P8 P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.3589 34.3735 34.4958 37.983 50.3085 33. 7/8 in.015 76.1709 29.992 P7Ls Maximum 1.471 1.476 1.662 P7a Full form major diameter Minimum 0. H.741 1.9210 23.3083 33.5457 39.393 1.0611 26.4960 37.421 61.8710 22.3741 34.1 – Dimensions for P7 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge (For Gauging Sucker Rod Pin Connections) 5/8 in.795 1. 1 1/8 in. This document is not an API Standard.127 1.261 P7Bs Maximum 0.9962 25.671 67.501 1. This gauge is used to 1) check the functional size of the pin thread at maximum material condition.902 1.1867 30.998 Pitch diameter Minimum 0. mm in.1209 28.5463 39.96 2. All rights reserved.0465 26. and 2) check pin face parallelism.1.756 1.1211 28.409 1.887 1.236 1.9362 23. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. mm in.8712 22.5615 39.9960 25.0459 26.9368 23.1715 29.3. mm in.5609 39.203 55.298 1.9216 23.779 1.3583 34. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.516 1.967 1.0617 26.566 1.276 Truncated major diameter Minimum 0. 3/4 in. 1 in.123 0.2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge.647 P7Es Maximum 0. Figure H. Nominal Size of Rod in.49 2.1 – P7 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P8 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Sucker Rod Pin Connections) Table H.952 1.231 1.303 1. mm in.37 2.581 1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1 and the dimensions in Table H. in whole or in part. Copyright API. mm P7Bst Maximum 0.128 0.58 106 .1861 30.142 1.84 3.

78 0.250 31. Length of thread Minimum 1.379 9.56 1.28 P8Ks Maximum 0.96 2.0772 27.890 22.63 2.660 16.48 3.620 41.331 8.080 27.597 65.2.26 P8a Diameter of counterbore Minimum 0.61 1.31 Diameter of thread relief P7Lp Maximum 2.0778 27.188 1.204 1.38 1.255 57.2. b This dimension defined by: P8Ks – 0.82 P7Lst Maximum 0.53 Diameter of plug or ring collar Minimum 1.4521 36.899 Minor diameter Minimum 0.53 Length of counterbore Minimum 0.25 3.883 P8Dq Maximum 0.73 Length of plug Minimum 2.20 2.625 41.955 24.93 2.47 P8Lq Maximum 0.02 1.08 2.3.269 57.605 40.995 50.62 1.48 Length of truncated portion (1/2 Minimum 0.35 1.23 1.28 1.61 1.3 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge.855 47.105 53.390 35.41 0.863 72. It is used 1) in setting the P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge.265 57.230 31.61 1.409 10.0625 in.2 and the dimensions in Table H.2646 32.173 55.299 58.218 30.690 93.268 83.78 1.4 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge. H.76 a The P7 and P8 gauges are for SR threads with a stress relief.8273 21.65 0. 107 .245 31.98 Length of ring Minimum 1.690 17.9529 24.418 36.37 0.56 1.238 82.72 of P7Ls) P7Dtrb Maximum 0.38 1.40 2.43 1.660 92.203 30.13 P8Lr Maximum 1.255 31.393 35. This document is not an API Standard.77 1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.893 73.960 24. This gauge is used to check the minimum functional pitch diameter of the pin thread.12 2.97 1.3.51 1.18 1.73 1.265 57.255 57.8279 21.41 1.188 30. P5 P5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.255 31. All rights reserved. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.953 49.63 0.005 50.495 37.585 40.361 1.969 24.630 41.085 27.612 15.15 1.438 36.457 11.487 12.73 2.88 1.343 34. and 2) for detecting wear.567 65.94 1.93 2.245 31.62 1.97 1.313 33.995 50.485 37.37 1.205 30.01 3.28 P8Df Maximum 1.23 1.67 2.15 1.24 1.999 25.580 40.4527 36.17 1.079 27.210 30.75 1.26 1.029 0.2652 32.61 0.398 35.67 2.96 P7Df Maximum 1.40 2.63 2.19 2.391 60. Copyright API.39 2.620 41.495 37.505 38.582 14. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. H.505 38. P6 P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.61 2.641 67.11 1.72 3.121 1.515 38.136 1.39 0.013 0.43 0.2 and the dimensions in Table H.54 0.125 53.53 1.301 7.015 25.765 19.376 1.005 50. This gauge represents the minimum permissible functional pitch diameter and maximum permissible major diameter of the pin thread.9523 24.875 47.53 Diameter of plug or ring collar Minimum 1.630 41.985 75.88 1.109 28. in whole or in part.

1150 28.3735 34.981 0.902 1.146 1.155 1.2 – P5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Sucker Rod and Polished Rod Pin Connections) Table H.785 1.67 0.832 P5 37.735 18. 7/8 in.26 0.3022 33.48920 7 P5Ls Maximum 1.406 1. 3/4 in.445 0.19 Length of truncated portion Minimum 0.5615 39.0611 26.1577 29.1867 30. Figure H.275 H.0333 26.0939 27.887 1.89 1.48 1.081 1.8654 21.43 0. This document is not an API Standard.640 41.4 Box Connections H.910 P5Bs Maximum 0.9081 23.8437 21.923 23.0617 26.953 24.765 19.967 1.1583 29.01 Length of ring Minimum 0.48945 37.48 1.171 1.703 17.1152 28.5325 38.798 20. All rights reserved.076 1.09 0.9689 24. mm in.828 21.485 37.485 37.735 18.231 1.3020 33.86 0.3453 34.67 0.5609 39.0327 26.2 – Dimensions for P5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge (For Gauging Sucker Rod and Polished Rod Pin Connections) 5/8 in.520 1.26 0. in whole or in part.952 1.986 0.779 1.421 1.151 1.673 17.127 1.02 0.825 Pitch diameter Minimum 0.8443 21.515 38.515 38. 1 in.86 0.610 40.3741 34.765 19.02 0.2803 32.43 0.890 48. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.72 1.321 1.9683 24.430 0.610 1.8656 21.67 0.67 0.4675 37.43 0.595 1.798 20. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.765 19.795 1.673 17.142 1.3447 34.860 47.0933 27. Nominal Size of Rod in.9087 23.9902 25.765 19.43 P6Lr Maximum 0.72 1. 1 1/8 in.43 0.9362 23.66 1. mm in.24 P6 P6Ks Maximum 0.797 20.066 1.66 1.770 1.535 1.2809 32.4681 37.071 1.24 P5Lst Maximum 0.828 21.735 18.9900 25.290 Minor diameter ring Minimum 0.9368 23.735 18.246 1.347 P5Es Maximum 0.640 41.662 Full form major diameter Minimum 0. mm P5Bst Maximum 0. Copyright API.1 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge.1861 30. mm in.4.5319 38.89 1.326 1.09 0.610 40. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.703 17.827 21.926 Truncated major diameter Minimum 0. B2 108 .01 Length of thread Minimum 1. mm in.

315 33. 7/8 in.89 1. The Reference Master B3 Box-cone Ring 109 .75 B2Df Maximum 1.349 1. mm B2Bs Maximum 0. 1 1/8 in.0630 27.005 50.520 38. and Sub-coupling Box Connections) 5/8 in.3760 34.15 1. This gauge is used on polished rod couplings and sub-couplings but does not check the 9° cone.23 1. and 2) to check coupling face parallelism.3105 33.255 57. This document is not an API Standard.62 1.43 1.8732 22.5636 39. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1880 30.49800 2 B2Dtr Maximum 0.1230 28.505 38.195 55.901 48. b B2 Go Box thread Plug Gauges are for box connections used with undercut pins. B3.0636 27.695 43.23 1.871 47.3107 33.9380 23.78 1.28 a B2 Go Box thread Plug Gauge does not check 9° cone.015 1.935 1.179 0.9386 23.371 34. This gauge represents the basic box cone.06 1. in whole or in part. and Sub-coupling Box Connections) Table H.86 1.61 1.8730 22.9980 25.621 41.028 26.840 1.651 41.76 0.3.778 19.11 1.94 1.245 31. 3/4 in. mm in.715 Major diameter Minimum 0.29 Length of thread Minimum 0.2 Box-cone Ring Gauge (Fitting Ring). outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.185 30.292 1.403 35.3754 34.215 30.026 26.960 49.996 25.710 43.5630 39.945 49. Copyright API. mm in. 1 in. The B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge is used 1) to check the functional size of the box thread at maximum material condition.78 2.05 1.620 41.190 1.903 22. mm in.049 Pitch diameter Minimum 0.495 37.330 33.40 1.82 1.30 1.354 1.40 2.505 38.9982 25.401 35.1232 28.3 and the dimensions in Table H. mm in.630 41. All rights reserved.175 1.700 38.174 0. B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.b Diameter of thread relief B2Ls Maximum 1. Polished Rod. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.216 30.000 1.950 1.529 1. H.40 2.255 31.10 1.97 1.67 2.287 1.265 57.4.59 1.53 Diameter of plug collar Minimum 1.93 2.17 1.524 1.3 – B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Sucker Rod.4.88 1.055 B2Es Maximum 0.995 50.94 1.59 Length of plug Minimum 1.1886 30. Reference Master Reference Master B3 Box-cone Ring Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.825 1. Figure H.4 and the dimensions in Table H.64 B2a. Nominal Size of Rod in.3 – Dimensions for B2 Go Box-thread Plug Gauge (For Gauging Sucker Rod.49825 6 38.52 B2Lp Maximum 1. Polished Rod.110 53.

4 and the dimensions in Table H.319 110 . outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. mm in.4.799 1.9233 23.0488 26.4.3606 34. It can be used to gauge the product box cone.3 Box-cone Plug Gauge. This gauge is used to establish and verify the standoff of the Reference Master B3 Box- cone Ring Gauge.1732 29.1 Box-cone Plug Gauge.4 and the dimensions in Table H. B4.1738 29. mm in. 1 1/8 in. in whole or in part. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. B4. mm in. Copyright API. Reference Master Reference Master B4 Box-cone Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.4.640 1.452 1.4 – B3 Box-cone Ring Gauge and B4 Box-cone Plug Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Polished Rod and Sub-coupling Box Connections) Table H. H.0482 26. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Gauge is used to establish and verify the standoff of the mating Reference Master B4 Box-cone Plug Gauge and the corresponding Working B4 Box-cone Plug Gauge.9239 23. All rights reserved. This gauge is used on polished rod couplings and sub-couplings to check the standoff of the box cone. Nominal Size of Rod in. Working Working B4 Box-cone Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H. 1 in.4.334 B4a Major diameter Minimum 0.624 1. H. but this should be kept to an absolute minimum. Mm in.5480 39.3612 34. mm B4Bs Maximum 0.574 1.4 – Dimensions for B3 Box-cone Ring Gauge and B4 Box-cone Plug Gauge (For Gauging Polished Rod and Sub-coupling Box Connections) 5/8 in.467 1.815 1. Do not use on sucker rod couplings.3. 7/8 in.559 1. 3/4 in. This document is not an API Standard.5486 39. Figure H.

038 mm).005 50.265 57.89 1.295 32.90 Length of plug Minimum 1.865 21.0680 27.0678 27.4 No-go Box-thread Plug Gauge.675 42.295 32.446 36.197 30.295 32.78 1.0625 in.97 1. All rights reserved.071 27.946 24.98 1.97 1.62 0.826 B4Dtra Maximum 0.1928 30.62 1.297 1.9905 25.51 0.615 15.822 20.3025 33.00 0.97 B4Df Maximum 1.67 2. Copyright API.127 1.925 48.010 25.838 Pitch diameter Minimum 0.265 32.13 B3Drcb Reference See note b See note b See note b See note b See note b Diameter of ring cone B3a B3Df Maximum 1.445 36.55 1.084 1.895 48.525 38.760 19.97 1.255 57.28 B3Ks Maximum 0.620 41.258 31.90 Length of ring Minimum 1.3805 35.40 1.245 31.335 8.15 1.255 31.005 50.315 8.40 2.645 41.48 1.015 25.62 1.505 38.335 8.505 38. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.245 31. This gauge is used on sucker rod couplings.30 0.73 1.53 Diameter of plug collar Minimum 1.255 31.895 22.675 42.947 24.495 37.994 0.302 1.255 57.071 1.9430 23.25 mm) ± 0.5 and the dimensions in Table H.1155 28.995 50.93 2.5680 39.95 1.73 Minor diameter Minimum 0.5678 39.9428 23.1930 30.620 41.645 16.045 26.315 8.122 1.325 in.265 32.67 2.1150 28. (0.895 48.23 1.65 1.4.89 1.952 1. and sub-couplings to check the maximum functional pitch diameter of the box thread.5.495 37.78 1.15 Relief diameter B4Lgp Maximum 0. in whole or in part.981 0.321 1.275 32.23 1.995 50.335 8.20 1.74 Length of thread Minimum 0.13 B3Lr Maximum 1.70 a B4Dtr is defined by the equation: B3Ks – 0.335 8.85 0.072 27.9900 25.88 1.4892 37.045 26.159 1.259 31.00 B4Ls Maximum 0.40 2.88 1.03 1.88 0.93 2.015 25.885 22.947 1.89 1.51 0. (8.39 1.895 22.060 1.630 41.53 Diameter of ring collar Minimum 1.334 1. b Diameter of ring cone (dimension B3Drc) shall be such as to provide a standoff of 0.495 37.89 1.38 0.315 8.3020 33.51 Gage Point of Cone Minimum 0.265 32.05 1.8654 21.00 0.146 1.335 8.384 35. This document is not an API Standard.73 0.630 41.54 1.821 20.97 0.54 1.78 1.8659 21.00 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.827 Diameter of plug cone at gage Minimum 0.0015 in.13 1.645 41.13 1. H.28 B4Dpc Maximum 0.15 1.265 57.265 32.245 31. B6 B6 No-go Box-thread Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.78 1.315 8.23 1. B4Es Maximum 0.51 0.295 32. 111 .315 8.822 point B4Lp Maximum 1.55 1.51 0.925 48.13 1. polished rod couplings.4897 37.065 1.3803 35.62 1.00 0.865 21.13 1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.

3188 33.3190 33.8806 22.43 0.6 and the dimensions in Table H.5.61 Length of thread Minimum 0. Copyright API.1308 28. This gauge represents the maximum permissible pitch diameter and major diameter of the pin thread.50655 38.602 1.827 1.765 19.0487 26.84 H.3617 34. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge. mm B6Bs Maximum 0.860 21. 2) in checking the shoulder squareness of the P2 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge.5 Polished Rod Pin Connections H.1737 29.5.9233 23. All rights reserved. 7/8 in. 3/4 in.467 1. in whole or in part. mm in.652 1.373 Major diameter Minimum 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.610 15.49 0.552 1. P1 P1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.503 1.640 16.49 0.1743 29.727 1.26 0. H.367 1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.587 1.722 1. mm in.5495 39. and Sub-coupling Box Connections) Table H.50680 38.5 – B6 No-go Box-thread Plug Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Sucker Rod.498 1. Nominal Size of Rod in.640 16.43 0.0493 26. 1 in.67 0. Figure H.610 15. P2 112 .2664 B6Ls Maximum 0.67 0.812 1.2 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge.8804 22.0060 25.9239 23. This document is not an API Standard.890 22.0058 25.26 0.1310 28.547 1.362 1. and 3) for detecting wear. Polished Rod.5501 39.357 B6Es Maximum 0.765 19.637 1. Polished Rod. 1 1/8 in. It is used in 1) setting the P2 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge.735 18.3623 34.6.735 18.5 – Dimensions for B6 No-go Box-thread Plug Gauge (For Gauging Sucker Rod. and Sub-coupling Box Connections) 5/8 in. mm in.2727 B6 Pitch diameter Minimum 0.452 1. mm in.

265 32.015 25.471 1.662 Full form major diameter Minimum 0.795 1.276 Truncated major diameter Minimum 0.409 1.890 22.07 2. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.765 44.1861 30. mm in.9210 23.264 57.265 57.61 1.762 19.3085 33.23 1.88 1.51 113 .5615 39.647 P1Lst Maximum 0.254 31.785 45.1715 29.735 44.04 2.07 1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.13 1.8712 22.1709 29.53 Diameter of plug collar Minimum 1.13 1.5463 39.9216 23.9960 25.005 50.49600 37.26 0.390 35. This document is not an API Standard.80 2.82 P1Lp Maximum 1.203 30.741 1.985 75.1867 30.535 89.123 0.515 38.902 1.485 63.93 2.88 3.3741 34.6 and the dimensions in Table H. P2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.890 22. All rights reserved. Figure H. 7/8 in. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.49 0. Mm in.860 21.84 0.640 16.49575 37. This gauge is used to 1) check the functional size of the pin thread at maximum material condition and 2) to check the parallelism of the shoulder face.12 2.35 0.58 Length of thread Minimum 1.6 – Dimensions for P1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge (For Gauging Polished Rod Pin Connections) 5/8 in.735 44.516 1.3583 34.34 2.0465 26.85 1.515 63.9962 25. Nominal Size of Rod in.128 0.756 1. 1 in.815 46.127 1.485 37.065 77.61 0.779 1.315 58.505 38.9368 23. Copyright API.504 38.0611 26.80 3.765 44.3083 33. Mm in.6.8710 22.565 90.015 76.10 2.9921 P1Ls Maximum 1.6 – P1 Go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge and P2 Go Pin-thread Ring Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Polished Rod Pin Connections) Table H.56 1.5457 39.890 22.79 P1Df Maximum 1.610 15. mm in.9362 23. mm P1Bst Maximum 0.90 2.142 1.83 1.630 41.5609 39.38 2.860 21. 3/4 in.035 77.0617 26.83 2.3589 34.9984 Pitch diameter Minimum 0.40 2.0459 26.235 31. 1 1/8 in.629 41.37 1.55 Length of plug Minimum 1.265 32.952 1.887 1.393 1.255 31.09 3.84 1.231 1.48 Length of truncated portion Minimum 0.566 1. in whole or in part.235 31.476 1.303 1.236 1.04 3.967 1.004 50.31 Diameter of thread relief P1 P1Es Maximum 0.315 58.1209 28.285 58.298 1.37 1.261 P1Bs Maximum 0.3735 34.285 58.20 1.85 3.581 1.1211 28.61 1.78 1. The P2 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge does not check the 9° cone.501 1.72 P1Dtra Maximum 0.

188 1.0778 27.398 35.13 P2Lf Maximum 1.393 35.23 1.580 40.8279 21.85 1.375 34.51 P2Ks Maximum 0.40 2. P2Df Maximum 1.9523 24.07 1.61 1.205 30.42 1.505 38. 114 .210 30.4. P4 Reference Master P4 Pin Cone Ring Gauge shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H. in whole or in part.93 1. This gauge represents the basic pin cone.5875 mm).73 1.5.3 Reference Master Pin Cone Plug Gauge. P4 Working P4 Pin Cone Ring Gauge shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.264 57.955 24.58 1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.013 0.7.254 31.105 28.80 Length of ring Minimum 1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 Working Pin Cone Ring Gauge.7 and the dimensions in Table H.085 27.26 1.355 34.899 Minor diameter Minimum 0.56 1.136 1. This gauge is used to check the standoff of the pin cone on polished rod pins.883 P2 P2Dq Maximum 0.4 Reference Master Pin Cone Ring Gauge.2646 32.38 2. H. Copyright API.0772 27.4521 36.376 1.93 1.8273 21. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. H.265 57.42 1. It can be used to gauge the product pin cone. H.94 1. P3 Reference Master P3 Pin Cone Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.38 1. Do not use on sucker rod pins.629 41.004 50.000 50.51 1.5. (1.960 24.20 1. This Gauge is used to establish and verify the standoff of the Reference Master P3 Pin Cone Plug Gauge.750 44.504 38.29 A P1Dtr is defined by the equation: P2Ks – 0. All rights reserved.361 1.4527 36.730 43.7 and the dimensions in Table H.26 Diameter of counterbore Minimum 0. The Reference Master P3 Pin Cone Plug Gauge is used as the master to establish and verify the standoff of the mating Reference Master P4 Pin Cone Ring Gauge and the corresponding Working P4 Pin Cone Ring Gauge.43 1.355 34.121 1.2652 32.080 27.7.7.90 2.7 and the dimensions in Table H.38 1.5.125 28.88 1. This document is not an API Standard. but this use should be kept to an absolute minimum.45 2.005 50.53 Diameter of ring collar Minimum 1.93 2.029 0.204 1.0625 in.630 41.255 31.585 40.980 50.375 34.9529 24.

5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge. b Diameter of ring cone P3Drc shall be such as to provide a standoff of 0. H.995 50.77 1.015 25.540 1.7 – P3 Pin-cone Plug Gauge and P4 Pin-cone Ring Gauge Illustration (For Gauging Polished Rod Pin Connections) Table H.0680 27.018 1.15 1.505 38.630 41.73 1.78 1.26 0.88 1.620 41.97 0.630 41.9430 23.505 38.26 mm) ±0.975 24. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.93 2.925 48. Mm in.3190 33.1305 28.015 25. (0.94 1.727 1.59 0.13 P4 P4Df Maximum 1.039 26. It is used in setting the P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge.101 27.2 and the dimensions in Table H.0055 25.260 P3Ls Maximum 0.0625 in.28 P4Ks Maximum 0.100 27.367 1.89 1.169 1.865 21.13 1.295 32.3185 33.23 1.378 1. P6 115 .13 1.23 1.26 0.97 P3 P3Lp Maximum 1.924 P3Dtra Maximum 0.245 31. 1 in. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.947 1.295 32. Copyright API.74 Length of thread Minimum 0.475 37.53 Diameter of plug collar Minimum 1.5.925 48.5678 39.045 26.14 1.914 23.97 1. in whole or in part.62 1.525 38.255 31.26 0.40 2.55 1.495 37.5724 39.005 50.265 32.39 1.0710 27.62 0.39 1.060 1.325 in.255 57.28 P4Drcb Reference See note b See note b See note b See note b See note b Diameter of ring cone P4Lr Maximum 1.5718 39.645 16.69 1.78 1.72 1. Mm in. 1 1/8 in.0716 27.895 48.414 35.675 42.2.851 21.89 1.219 1.273 Pitch diameter Minimum 0.6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge.26 0.92 Diameter of thread relief P3Es Maximum 0.47 a P3Dtr is defined by the equation: P4Ks – 0. mm P3Bs Maximum 0.675 42.5.89 1.78 1.203 1.1928 30.325 8.0015 in.490 1. (8.88 1. 7/8 in.0678 27.1960 30.226 31.715 1.952 1.822 point P3Df Maximum 1.9462 24.939 Major diameter Minimum 0.552 1.287 32.325 8.503 1.288 32.0060 25.265 32.79 1.255 57.355 1.62 1.302 1.73 0. H.54 1. Nominal Size of Rod in.5680 39.40 2.1930 30.93 2.325 8.275 32.62 1.495 37.97 1.265 32.394 1.033 1.49 Minor diameter Minimum 0.89 1.976 24.90 Length of plug Minimum 1.26 Gauge point of cone P3Dpc Maximum 0.265 57.8801 22.895 48.90 Length of ring Minimum 1.895 22.1966 30.325 8.295 32.5068 38. P5 P5 No-go Pin-thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauges shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.245 31.3805 35.67 2. All rights reserved. mm in.38 0.9428 23.154 1.3840 35.789 20.325 8.995 50.13 P3Lgp Maximum 0.038 mm).045 26.22 1.005 50.04 0.53 Diameter of plug or ring collar Minimum 1. 3/4 in. (1.5875 mm).297 1.54 1.265 57.1310 28. This document is not an API Standard.895 22.850 21.295 32.3846 35.55 1.827 Diameter of plug cone at gauge Minimum 0. mm in.645 41.615 15.645 41.8806 22.62 0. Figure H.7 – Dimensions for P3 Pin-cone Plug Gauge and P4 Pin-cone Ring Gauge (For Gauging Polished Rod Pin Connections) 5/8 in.13 1. This gauge represents the minimum permissible functional pitch diameter and maximum permissible major diameter of the pin thread.5063 38.127 1.476 37.97 1.78 1.9456 24. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.15 1.495 37.122 1.245 31.620 41.065 1.97 1.865 21.255 31.3803 35.67 2.265 32.13 1.

The combined variation shall not exceed 0.0064 Runout of face (P2 and P8) 0.0002 0.00025 ±0.2 and the dimensions in Table H.0003 to 0. Table H. and B2) b 0. mm P1 0.0007 in.26 ±0.0004 0.0006 0.018 116 .0064 Runout of shoulder face (P1. or 9 pitches. (0.008 to 0. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. mm Half angle of thread ±6 minutes ±6 minutes Lead a ±0.2. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. In the case of truncated setting plugs.6 Tolerances Tolerances for gauges shall conform to Table H.00025 ±0. H.325 ±0.005 to 0. whichever is less. the combined variation of mating gauges shall be determined by the use of a gauge block. This gauge is used to check the minimum functional pitch diameter of the pin thread.038 a The tolerance shown is the maximum deviation in lead between any two threads.005 Eccentricity of cone with respect to thread (P3 and B4) – total indicator reading 0. whether adjacent or separated by an amount not exceeding the full length of threads less one full turn at each end.0002 0.0015 8.0003 0. mm Half angle of thread ±6 minutes ±6 minutes Lead a ±0.7 Axial Variation Axial variation for the respective gauges shall conform to the requirements listed in Table H. Table H.005 Eccentricity of cone with respect to thread – total indicator reading 0.003 mm) over any portion equivalent to the length of the thread ring gauge.008 Go Pin thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge P8 0. in whole or in part. as feeler gauges.8.0004 0.010 Tolerance Ring Gauges in.0001 in. (0. whichever is less. P7.010 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge P7 0. the lead variations present on the full-form portion and the truncated portion of an individual gauge shall not differ from each other by more than 0. In the case of setting plugs. or a combination of gauge blocks. P6 shall be furnished in the configuration shown in Figure H.0004 0. All rights reserved.9. P6 No-go Pin-thread Ring Gauge. This document is not an API Standard.010 Go Pin thread Ring Gauge B2 0.008 Go Pin thread Truncated Setting Plug Gauge P2 0.0002 to 0.9 – Allowable Axial Variation of Shoulder Face Axial Variation of Shoulder Face a Gauge in. this tolerance applies to a length of thread equal to that of the thread in the mating ring gauge or 9 pitches.015 Standoff from plug (P4 and B3) b 0. H. Copyright API.008 Go Box thread Plug Gauge a If the axial centers of plug gauges P7 and P1 have been damaged so that a reliable determination of the variation in shoulder faces cannot be obtained.0003 0.0003 0.8 –Tolerances for Gauges Tolerance Plug Gauges in. b Ring shall be assembled with mating plug to cone contact by hand without spinning.

mm).3. c) the gauge symbol as given in H. H. as applicable. in whole or in part.17 H.1 Product Identification Markings Gauges shall be permanently marked by the gauge manufacturer with the markings provided below.8. h) manufacturer’s serial number.8.10 – Example of Gauge Marking Manufacturer’s Name or Gauge Symbol and 2A-Pin or 2B-Box and Working. Unless otherwise stated. OR REFERENCE MASTER (reference master shall only be marked as a reference master if meeting all further requirements in section H.5. 06 . as applicable. SET PLUG. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Set Plug or Manufacturer’s Date of Identifying Mark Specification Size Go. 11B P7 – 3/4 2A-PIN-GO SET PLUG --.1 Example of Gauge Marking A go pin thread truncated setting plug gauge. Plug gauges should preferably be marked on the body. or H.2 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings which include the API Monogram and license number may be applied.10). although marking on the handle is acceptable on gauges in small sizes or when the handle is integral to the body.4. for a P7 – 3/4 2A Pin Go ring manufactured in June of 2014 shall be marked as follow: Table H. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. Copyright API. H. as applicable.8.1. 117 . No-Go or Cone Reference Master Serial Number Manufacture --. b) specification (11B). i) date of manufacturer with two digits for the month and two digits for the year. Any markings which are considered necessary by the gauge marker may be added. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.8 Marking Requirements (by Manufacturer) H. d) the nominal size of the rod. e) the word 2A-PIN or 2B-BOX. g) the word(s) WORKING. both the plug and the ring shall be marked at a minimum as follows: a) the gauge manufacturer’s name or identifying mark. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. All rights reserved. H. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. f) the word GO or NO-GO or CONE. This document is not an API Standard.

Copyright API. see the API Composite List at www. This document is not an API Standard.api. the certifying agency shall issue a report to the gauge manufacturer stating the reason for rejection and showing the measured value for those dimensions which are outside the permissible limits. For each gauge which does not conform to all requirements. in whole or in part. H. No-go or Cone f) Working.9 Ordering Information Suggestions for ordering for gauges: a) Specification 11B b) Gauge symbol c) Nominal rod size (diameter) d) Pin or Box e) Go. People’s Republic of China. the certifying agency shall issue a certificate to the gauge owner.api. b) National Institute of Metrology. Current list: a) Instituto Nacional De Technologia Industrial. A single reference master plug or a single reference master ring gauge may not be certified unless accompanied by a previously certified mating reference master gauge. a reference master plug and a reference master ring gauge.10 Reference Master Gauge Certification All new and reconditioned reference master plug and mating ring gauges required by this standard.org. e) Oil Country Tubular Goods Inspection Laboratory. Middlesex.org). i. Maryland. Gaithersbury. 118 . H. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. All rights reserved. Teddington.e. Buenos Aires. set plug or reference master and special markings required g) Quantity H.11 Reference Master Gauge Certification Agencies For the most recent list of certifying agencies.compositlist. Argentina.9 (for the most recent list of certifying agencies. For each gauge that complies with all requirements. prior to use. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. d) National Physical Laboratory. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. shall be certified to be in conformance with the stipulations given in Annex H. England. Beijing. Reference master gauges must be certified in complete sets. stating that the gauge complies with API 11B. see the API Composite List at compositelist. by one of the certifying agencies listed in H. c) National Institute of Standards and Technology.

the markings as applied by the certifying agency making the previous test shall be replaced as necessary. shall not be marked on reference master gauges.9 (for the most recent list of certifying agencies. 119 . so that only one set of markings appears on the recertified gauge. SHAANXI.3.12 Reference Master Gauge Marking (by Certifying Agency) The certifying agency shall verify the markings required under H. and on the plug gauge only for box gauges. Germany.13 Re-certification of Reference Master Gauges All reference master gauges required by this standard shall be submitted for testing to one of the certifying agencies listed in H. stating whether or not the gauge complies with the specifications of API 11B. in whole or in part. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. c) Mating standoff – the initial mating standoff of cone gauges shall be marked on the ring gauge only for pin gauges.org) once every five (5) years at a minimum. the previous certification date shall be replaced with the date of recertification. h) Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt. g) Exploration and Development Corporation BAOJI.10.api. H. All rights reserved. In recertifying reconditioned gauges. Dates of retest.compositelist. and shall mark all acceptable reference master gauges (both plug and ring unless otherwise stated below) with these markings as follows: a) Name or mark of certifying agency – the identification mark of the certifying agency shall be placed on all gauges. f) China Natural Oil & Gas. The certifying agencies shall furnish the owner of the gauges with a report. see the API Composite List at www. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. b) Date of certification – the date of certification shall be marked on all gauges. Copyright API. and if not. as required by H.6. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Note H. giving the measurements of the elements which are outside the permissible limits. People’s Republic of China.3: In recertifying reconditioned gauges. H. Note H.2: The certifying agency may mark the gauges with any additional markings considered necessary for proper identification. Braunschweig.

It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. This document is not an API Standard.1 General Pumping tees shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements provided in this Standard. I. size of the major outlet and the operating working pressure. in whole or in part. 120 . The nominal size of pumping tees shall be in accordance with the size and type of top and bottom connection. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2. Annex I (normative) Pumping Tees I. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. I.2 Design Requirements The following requirements shall be followed in the design of pumping tees. All rights reserved.1 Dimensional Requirements Pumping tees shall be manufactured and supplied with the top and bottom connections as threaded or flanged joints.

3. I. size and connection type. Box Thread 4 Major Outlet (aka.3. bleeder valve outlet). I.1 for the grade specified.1 – Pumping Tee Illustration I. in whole or in part. All rights reserved.3 Material Requirements I.2.2. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Box Thread. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2 Chemical Analysis 121 .2.4 mm) line pipe thread conforming to API 5B.3. This document is not an API Standard. Box Thread (box thread is a line pipe thread) (box thread is a line pipe thread) Figure I. I. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 Chemical Composition Pumping tees shall conform to the chemical composition requirements in Table I.2 Connection Type The top and bottom connections shall be threaded connections conforming to API 5B or flanged joints conforming to API 6A. (25. The major outlet shall be line pipe threads conforming to API 5B and the minor outlet shall be a 1 in. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6.2. Copyright API.3 Operating Working Pressure The manufacturer shall establish documented operating working pressure ratings for each grade. The ratings shall be detailed in the material specification for each design. Box Thread or Flanged Joint 2 Bottom Connection. Pin Thread or Flanged Joint (box thread is a tubing or line pipe thread) (box or pin thread is a tubing or line pipe thread) 3 Minor Outlet (aka. Key 1 Top Connection. flowline outlet).

I. I. in whole or in part.3. I. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. and molybdenum that totals a minimum of 1. a Or an equivalent international series number steel. The test results shall be conducted according to the acceptance criteria defined below and the results of each test shall be documented. This document is not an API Standard.4.3. All rights reserved. A chemical analysis shall be performed on each heat of steel used in the manufacture of pumping tees. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.2. I. The methods of inspecting and testing shall be sufficient to comply with the requirements as defined below.2% offset Minimum Tensile Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa a C1 ASTM A395 a UNS G10XX Series Steel C2 a UNS G15XX Series Steel a UNS G41XX Series Steel C3 UNS G51XX Series Steel a 40 276 60 414 a UNS G86XX Series Steel Special alloy shall be any chemical composition that contains a C4 combination of nickel. Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties for Pumping Tees Minimum Yield. size and connection type shall be hydrostatic tested to validate the operating working pressure. Each test shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s written procedures and acceptance criteria defined below.1 Design Validation Test Each design shall be validated by conducting a hydrostatic test at two times the rated working pressure by pressurizing against a closed end cap and test fixture.15% alloying content.1 for the grade specified. Table I. Copyright API.4 Inspecting and Testing Requirements Inspecting and testing requirements shall be performed by qualified person(s) using the manufacturer’s documented procedures. 122 .1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2 is an acceptable means to comply with this requirement. This analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM A751.3 Mechanical Properties Pumping tees shall conform to the mechanical property requirements in Table I. A MTR conforming to the requirements of 6. 0. chromium.1 Design Validation Each pumping tee design by grade.4.1 – Grade.

33 mm). Reduction of pressure to zero. I.5. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. I. I. b) Standard. e) Size and type of the major outlet. the equipment and the pressure-monitoring gauge have been isolated from the pressure source and the external surfaces of the body members have been thoroughly dried. die stamped. Do not start the timing until the test pressure (2 times the working pressure) has been reached. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. typically used for higher pressures (greater than 3. This document is not an API Standard. forged. Threaded connections. in whole or in part. for the hydrostatic test shall not exceed 3 times the normal volume of the pumping tee. f) Grade 123 .05 mm per 6. the following product identification markings shall be applied. measured in the plane of the tee face. at the option of the manufacturer. Both pressure holding periods shall not be less than 3 minutes. low stress permanent markings or any combination.1 Product Identification Markings As a minimum. shall conform to API 6A. shall conform to API 5B. The total test volume of water. in any order. Flanged joints.013 in. once isolated. on the external body or nameplate which is permanently attached by the manufacturer.2 Top Connection. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Bottom Connection.000 psi).1 m) of projected axis]. Copyright API.750 in. I. per 20 ft (19.5 Marking Pumping tees shall be permanently and legibly marked. All rights reserved.4. The first application of 2 times the working pressure during the holding period. laser engraving. shall not exceed 0.000 psi or less). 2. typically used for lower pressures (3.179° [0. The maximum angular misalignment shall not exceed 0. Major Outlet and Minor Outlet Pumping tees shall be inspected in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented procedures and the applicable Standard. No visible leakage of the pumping tee shall occur during each holding period. 11B.3 Radial and Angular Misalignment Inspections The maximum radial displacement of axes. a) Manufacturer’s name or mark. c) Size and type of top connection d) Size and type of the bottom connection. Methods of markings shall include cast.4. Hydrostatic test for the pumping tee shall consist of three parts: 1. (0. A second application of 2 times the working pressure during the holding period. 3.

I.1 Example of Product Identification Markings 3 7 A pumping tee having a 2 /8 in. (73. j) The year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year. I.1.2 – Example of Product Identification Marking Manufacturer’s Name or Maximum Operating Working Pressure.6.000 psi (34 Mpa) manufactured in February 2017 shall be marked as follows. 02 17 I.2 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings. with January represented as number 01.80 mm) line pipe thread major outlet.1 Thread Storage Compound A temporary atmospheric corrosion inhibitor thread storage compound shall be applied to box and pin threads prior to the installation of thread protectors. Grade C2 and a maximum working pressure of 5. Table I. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.6. Copyright API. with 2017 represented as the number 17. 2 /8 in. (60. This document is not an API Standard.2 Thread Protectors Thread protectors shall be designed and installed to protect pin and/or box threads from physical damage during handling. transportation and storage. which include the API Monogram and License Number. (50. in whole or in part. g) Maximum operating working pressure rating.33 mm) upset tubing thread on top. i) The month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser.5.03 mm) non-upset tubing thread on bottom. may be applied on the external body or nameplate. a 2 in.6. I. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. 11B 2 /8 EUE x 2 /8 NU x 2 LP C2 5000 --. Mark Standard Size of Threads Grade psi Heat Code Month Year 3 7 --. I.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all pumping tees.3 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings 124 . All rights reserved. h) Heat code. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above.5. chronologically. I.

7 Handling. e) Stored pumping tees shall be inspected at regular intervals. transportation and storage. Box and pins threads 125 . state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed.1 General Requirements These general requirements shall be followed for the handling. The pumping tees shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments. obstruct access to emergency equipment. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized pumping tees shall not exceed the manufacturer’s written specifications for transportation of the product. interlocked and limited in height so the tier or stack is stable. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. transportation and storage.6. transportation and storage operations.3 Storage Requirements a) The storage of pumping tees shall not create hazards.6. I. Copyright API. transportation and storage of all pumping tees.2 Transportation Requirements a) All applicable federal.7. c) Packaged pumping tees stored in tiers or stacks. These coatings shall be applied before transportation of the pumping tees and shall be maintained during storage. b) Pumping tees shall be separated and stored by grade. A protective coating shall be applied to the bodies and machined surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling. Rust on bodies should be removed with a nonabrasive brush and a suitable atmospheric corrosion protective coating applied (see I. c) Palletized and un-palletized pumping tees shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transportation vehicle.7. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. shall be blocked. I. All rights reserved. A protective coating that does not obscure product identification markings is preferred. or impede ingress and egress traffic. a) During all handling. I.3).7. care shall be exercised to prevent pumping tees from contacts which might cause damage to the threads or to the pumping tee itself.4 Packaging Requirements Pumping tees shall be packaged according to the manufacturer’s requirements such that the pumping tees will not be damaged during handling. b) There shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized pumping tees for easy access and safe handling. d) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. I. in whole or in part. one above the other. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products I. This document is not an API Standard. size and connection type.

I. d) Size of the major outlet. c) Grade. are provided with thread protectors. c) Connection type and size for the top and bottom connection. d) Working Pressure.) and thread protectors installed (see I. 11B b) Size.2). it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. in whole or in part.6. e) Quantity.6. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. All rights reserved. a) Standard. a suitable thread storage compound applied (see I.1. Copyright API. This document is not an API Standard. 126 .8 Ordering Information The following general guidelines are suggested for ordering pumping tees. cleaned with a nonabrasive brush. the thread should be assessed for damage. Whenever observed to be without such protection. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.

J. Stuffing Box with Dual Packing Stuffing Box with Dual Packing 127 .g. All rights reserved. bonnet or cap. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard. J. Annex J (normative) Stuffing Boxes J. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Additionally the body encloses the seal section. upper body. The body holding pressure for the stuffing box body shall be supplied by the manufacturer. etc. lower body.1 General The body consists of one or more elements (e. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.1 General Stuffing box bodies shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements provided in this Standard.2..2 Design Requirements The following requirements shall be followed in the design of stuffing box body. Copyright API. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.).

3 Material Requirements J.2.). The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6.3. Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties Minimum Yield. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. J. exposure to hydrogen sulfide environments. Copyright API. Minimum Tensile 0.1 and F. Figure J. high water cuts.3 Bottom Connection The bottom connection shall be a threaded connection conforming to API 5B or a flanged joint conforming to API 6A.2% offset Grade Chemical Composition ksi Mpa ksi Mpa a C1 ASTM A395 UNS G10XX Series Steel a C2 UNS G15XX Series Steel a 40 276 60 414 a UNS G41XX Series Steel C3 UNS G51XX Series Steel a UNS G86XX Series Steel a 128 . All rights reserved. and state the operating environment for each specific assembly (e.1 Chemical Composition Stuffing box bodies shall conform to the chemical composition requirements in Table J. volatile organic compounds.3.2 Dimensional Requirements Stuffing box bodies shall be furnished for the polished rod sizes listed in Tables F. J. J.1.3. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 for the grade specified.2 Mechanical Properties Stuffing box bodies shall conform to the mechanical property requirements in Table J. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Table J.1 – Grade.2 and/or polished rod liners listed in Table N.2.. J. etc.3. This document is not an API Standard.1 Seal Section The manufacturer shall define documented recommendations for the stuffing box assembly.2.1 – Stuffing Box Illustration J. including seal section. in whole or in part.g.2.1 for the grade specified.1.

3. tightness of the stuffing box. A second application of 2 times the working pressure during the holding period. alignment. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1. shall conform to API 6A.1 Design Validation Stuffing boxes shall be designed with flanged or threaded connections.). Reduction of pressure to zero.. Flanged connections. temperature. Do not start the timing until the test pressure (2 times the working pressure) has been reached. Both pressure holding periods shall not be less than 3 minutes.000 psi). 129 . The total test volume of water. 2. J.g. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.3 Operating Working Pressure The maximum operating working pressure shall be defined by the manufacturer. threaded or flanged.000 psi). J..1 Body Pressure Rating Test The design for the body of stuffing boxes. J. Each test shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s written procedures and acceptance criteria defined below. shall be validated by conducting a hydrostatic test at two times the rated body pressure rating by pressurizing against a closed end cap and test fixture. The test results shall be documented. and molybdenum that totals a minimum of 1. packing selection) and other operating variables (e. the equipment and the pressure-monitoring gauge have been isolated from the pressure source and the external surfaces of the body members have been thoroughly dried. NOTE J. Threaded connections. fluid media.g. No visible leakage of the body of the stuffing box shall occur during each holding period. etc.4. when used for higher pressures (typically greater than 3. Special alloy shall be any chemical composition that contains a combination of C4 nickel.4 Inspecting and Testing Requirements J. for the hydrostatic test shall not exceed 3 times the normal volume of the stuffing box. Each stuffing box design by size shall be hydrostatic tested to validate the body pressure rating and the static seal system leak pressure.15% alloying content a Or an equivalent international series number steel.1 The maximum operating working pressure of the stuffing box assembly is dependent on the seal section (e. The first application of 2 times the working pressure during the holding period.3. chromium. surface finish of the polished rod or liner.4. shall conform to API 5B. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Hydrostatic test for the body pressure rating shall consist of three parts: 1. The tests shall be conducted according to the acceptance criteria defined below with the results documented. in whole or in part. All rights reserved. Copyright API. once isolated. when used for lower pressures (typically less than 3. This document is not an API Standard.

it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. (0. once isolated.4.179 degrees [0. shall not exceed 0. Reduction of pressure to zero. The test shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s written procedures and acceptance criteria below.05 mm) over a 20 ft (6.1 m) projected axis].2 Static Seal System Leak Pressure Test A hydrostatic test shall be conducted on the stuffing box assembly to determine the maximum static pressure the assembly will hold. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.3 Radial Displacement Inspection The maximum radial displacement of the axis of the packing chamber and the bottom thread.750 in.2 Thread Inspection Stuffing box threads (see API 5B) or flanges (see API 6A) shall be inspected in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented procedures and the applicable Standard. The maximum angular misalignment shall not exceed 0. J.1 Stuffing Box Body Marking Requirements 130 . Both pressure holding periods shall be a minimum of 3 minutes at 2 times the operating working pressure.5 Marking J. for the hydrostatic test shall not exceed 3 times the normal volume between the polished rod and stuffing box. in whole or in part. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. The test results shall be documented. J. measured in a plane perpendicular to the axis.4. No pressure drop or visible leakage of the seal system shall occur during each holding period. J. This document is not an API Standard.5. Do not start the timing until the seal system rating pressure has been reached. The total test volume of water. (19. while properly installed per the manufacturer’s instructions (the minimum amount of torque shall be applied to seal-off the system). The various stuffing box assemblies shall be tested with a non- reciprocating (static) polished rod conforming to the dimensional and surface finish requirements in Annex F. All rights reserved. Copyright API.79 mm).031 in. The first application of static seal system pressure rating during the holding period. 2. A polished rod body with a minimum length of 4 feet sufficiently anchored to prevent movement. the equipment and the pressure-monitoring gauge have been isolated from the pressure source and the external surfaces of the body members have been thoroughly dried. Hydrostatic test for the stuffing box assembly shall require the following: 1.1. 4. 3. without leaking. A second application of static seal system pressure rating during the holding period.4. J.

numerals 1 through 12 may be used. packing. static seal pressure rating of 1. manufactured in February 2017 shall be marked as follows.. a) Polished rod or polished rod liner size b) Type of packing c) Composition of packing used for the static seal system leak pressure test. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1. J. bushings.000 psi (6. maximum working pressure of 2. the following information shall be included with the additional industry markings or identified by permanent markers. When furnished as a complete assembly. Copyright API. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 2 /8 EUE 2500 --. d) Static seal system pressure rating. b) Size and type of bottom thread or flange.5. paint stenciling. d) Heat code: the code mark shall identify the product with respect to a record of the grade of steel. This document is not an API Standard. or any other semi-permanent method of marking to the point of use. in whole or in part. e) Month of manufacture: the month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12.3 – Example of Stuffing Box Assembly Product Identification Marking Composition of Packing used for the Static Seal System Leak Polished Rod or Liner Size Style of Packing Pressure Test Static Seal System Pressure Rating 1 1/4 Cone HNBR 1.).500 psi (17. Table J. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. (60. Alternately.2 Mpa).e. tape or tag.000 131 . a) Manufacturer’s name or mark. This record shall be available to the user or purchaser on request for five years from date of manufacture. f) The year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year.33 mm) upset tubing thread as a bottom connection. 1 1/4 in spray metal polished rod. All rights reserved. etc. Table J. with January represented as number 01. cone style HNBR packing. O-rings. 02 17 J. chronologically.5.2 – Example of Stuffing Box Body Product Identification Marking Manufacturer’s Name or Mark Standard Nominal Size Body Pressure Rating Heat Code Month Year 11B 3 --. c) Maximum body pressure rating for the stuffing box. Each stuffing box body shall be permanently marked on the external body or nameplate that is permanently attached by the manufacturer with the following information.1 Example 3 A stuffing box body having a 2 /8 in.89 Mpa).2 Assembly Markings Stuffing boxes may be sold either with or without the seal system (i.

7. J. in whole or in part. All rights reserved. J. J. Copyright API.6.7.1 Thread Storage Compound A temporary atmospheric corrosion inhibitor thread storage compound shall be applied to box and/or pin threads prior to the installation of thread protectors. J. J.3 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings which include the API Monogram and license number may be applied on the external body or name plate.7 Handling. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all stuffing boxes. transportation and storage operations. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products J. This document is not an API Standard.3 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings A protective coating shall be applied to the stuffing box body and machined surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. J. a) During all handling. J.5.2 Transportation Requirements 132 . Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. J. These coatings shall be applied before transportation of the stuffing box and shall be maintained during storage. transportation and storage of all stuffing boxes. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.6. care shall be exercised to prevent stuffing boxes from contacts which might cause damage to the threads or to the stuffing box itself.6. transportation and storage. transportation and storage. A protective coating that does not obscure product identification markings is preferred.2 Thread Protectors Thread protectors shall be designed and installed to protect pin and/or box threads from physical damage during handling.6. transportation and storage. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 General Requirements These general requirements shall be followed for the handling. b) There shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized stuffing boxes for easy access and safe handling.4 Packaging Requirements Stuffing boxes shall be packaged according to the manufacturer’s requirements such that the stuffing boxes will not be damaged during handling.

d) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. a) All applicable federal. g) Polished rod or polished rod liner size. b) Size and type of bottom thread or flange. 133 . one above the other. when applicable e) Maximum working temperature rating of the packing. J. when applicable f) Static seal system pressure rating for the style of packing and composition. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized stuffing boxes shall not exceed the manufacturer’s written specifications for transportation of the product. The stuffing boxes shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments. e) Stored stuffing boxes shall be inspected at regular intervals. cleaned with a nonabrasive brush.1.6. in whole or in part. when applicable. Whenever observed to be without such protection.8 Ordering Information Suggestions for ordering stuffing boxes are as follows: a) Stuffing box type. Box and pins threads are provided with thread protectors. when applicable. size and connection type. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse.7. d) Style of packing and composition.3). Rust on bodies should be removed with a nonabrasive brush and a suitable atmospheric corrosion protective coating applied (see I. state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed. c) Packaged stuffing boxes stored in tiers or stacks. This document is not an API Standard.3 Storage Requirements a) The storage of stuffing boxes shall not create hazards. c) Palletized and un-palletized stuffing boxes shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transportation vehicle. Copyright API. a suitable thread storage compound applied (see I. c) Body pressure rating. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.) and thread protectors installed (see I. All rights reserved. b) Stuffing boxes shall be separated and stored by grade. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. obstruct access to emergency equipment. J. or impede ingress and egress traffic.2).6.6. shall be blocked. interlocked and limited in height so the tier or stack is stable. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. the thread should be assessed for damage.

h) Quantity. in whole or in part. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. 134 . outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. This document is not an API Standard. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved.

1 Clamp Types There are two types of polished rod clamps. Copyright API. All rights reserved. This document is not an API Standard. in whole or in part. K. K. friction style clamps and indention style clamps.1 General Polished rod clamps shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements in this Standard. 135 . Annex K (normative) Polished Rod Clamps K.2. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2 Design Requirements The following requirements shall be followed in the design of polished rod clamps. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.

mm in. dimensions.70 1.e. Copyright API.23 Test Rod No. The validation tests detailed herein are to ensure that the polished rod clamp for each size and design will conform to the published rated loads.1.10 136 .) or material suppliers shall require a design validation test. manufacturers shall ensure polished rod clamps perform as designed to allow for differences in diameters. K. Any change to the design (i.2. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. All rights reserved.2. a) Friction Clamp b) Indention Clamp Figure K. in whole or in part.10 mm) Dimensional Element in. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.130 28. (31.505 38. Only a new polished rod clamp shall be used in each validation test.125 28. This test is considered non-destructive and any clamp passing this test is considered usable. materials. mm Maximum 1.75 mm) 1 1/2 in.88 1. Once a polished rod clamp is used for a validation test.250 28. Design validation test results shall be documented and retained for each size and design of polished rod clamp.500 38.255 31. The polished rod clamp shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions on a test rod of suitable length.3 Design Validation Test Due to tolerances allowed for the un-coated portion of polished rods with spray metal coating. For each polished rod clamp size and design. A test rod conforming to Table 2 with a surface finish conforming to Annex F for polished rods shall be used.1 – Polished Rod Clamps K. Table K. process.00 1.2 Dimensional Requirements Polished rod clamps shall be furnished for the polished rod sizes listed in Tables F. it shall not be used again. the manufacturer shall perform and document a minimum of two validation tests using test rod 1 and two validation test using test rod 2 (see Table 2).1 – Test Rods Polished Rod Size 1 1/8 in. etc. (38.58 mm) 1 1/4 in. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. (28.1 and F.2 and/or polished rod liners listed in Table N. 1 Minimum 1. This document is not an API Standard.58 1. mm in.

If a test results in failure.000 in.2.3 Material Requirements K. 137 .70 mm) per minute or be less than 0. (+0.21 Test Rod No. (12.1 Chemical Composition To meet the requirements of this Standard.3. The rate of separation of the crossheads under load shall not exceed 0.18 mm).3.016 / -0. The non-spray metal coated polished rod test sample that conforms to the requirements of polished rods in this Standard shall be suspended by the polished rod clamp from the upper crosshead of a tensile testing machine through a hole in a steel plate.1 Design Validation Test Procedure The validation test shall be conducted according to the following steps. The polished rod test sample shall be gripped in the lower crosshead and a load applied and increased until the first slippage of 0.4 Maximum Load Rating Each polished rod clamp design shall have a stated maximum load rating at a bolt torque value.56 1. K. (0.465 37.18 mm) per minute. The minimum load at slippage shall be 1.73 1.210 30. polished rod clamps shall be manufactured from any UNS or equivalent specification recommended cast iron or carbon steel as follows.86 1. or equivalent international series number.010 in. Failure to conform to this requirement shall constitute a test failure.67 1.125 in. Copyright API.2. K.41 / -0. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. (3. K.500 in.010 in.215 30. in whole or in part. (0. This load shall be recorded.2 Mechanical Properties The allowable hardness range for polished rod clamps is between 190 and 300 HB. Maximum 1. The tolerances on the hole diameter shall be +0. or equivalent international series number.2.085 27. 2 Minimum 1. The dimension of the hole shall be the nominal diameter of the polished rod plus 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. ASTM A536 ductile iron 65-45-12. Carbon Steel: UNS G1015 to UNS G1045 or UNS G1515 to 1545.00 mm). K.460 37. a successful new validation test is required prior to product production.125 in.25 mm) or more occurs between the test sample and the polished rod clamp.25 mm).25 times or greater than the published maximum rated load of the polished rod clamp. (3. This document is not an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.090 27. All rights reserved.3.08 K.2 Post Test Evaluation Examination of the surface of the polished rod test sample after the test and removal of the polished rod clamp shall not reveal any indentation or deformation in excess of 0.3.

2. f) Heat code g) Month of manufacture: the month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12. a) Manufacturer’s name or mark. at the option of the manufacturer.2.1. Copyright API. A successful retest shall be achieved prior to resuming production of that clamp design. K. forged.2. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2. 138 .5 Marking Requirements Polished rod clamps shall be permanently and legibly marked. b) Standard. Methods of markings shall include cast. in whole or in part. K. K.5.000 lbs load rating manufactured in February 2017 shall be marked as follows. AQL of 10% (see 7.2 Functional Test K.3.4.4.1 Example of Product Identification Markings 1 An indention type polished rod clamp for a 1 /4” polished rod with a 40. 11B c) Clamp type (F for friction or I for indention). the following product identification markings shall be applied.4.1).1 Product Identification Markings As a minimum.4.1 Performance The manufacturer shall perform a load test at a minimum per Table 2. chronologically. h) Year of manufacture: the year of manufacturer shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year. in any order.1. on the external body or nameplate which is permanently attached by the manufacturer. All rights reserved. This document is not an API Standard. low stress permanent markings or any combination. production of that clamp shall immediately be stopped and corrective measures applied. Single Sampling Plans for Normal Inspection. die stamped. d) Nominal polished rod or polished rod liner size. The load test shall be per L. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. K. laser engraving. with January represented as number 01. K. e) Load rating. General Inspection Level II.2 Post Test Evaluation If the clamp slips before reaching this load.5.4 Inspection and Testing K.

K.7 Handling. in whole or in part. transportation and storage.5. K.6.5. K. transportation and storage operations. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. which include the API Monogram and License Number. An atmospheric corrosion protective coating that does not obscure product identification markings is preferred. 02 17 K. This tag may be paper. plastic or metal. All rights reserved. may be applied on the external body or nameplate.1 General Requirements These general requirements shall be followed for the handling. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. care shall be exercised to prevent polished rod clamps from contacts which might cause damage to the threads or to the product itself. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products K.6.3 Installation Instructions A tag showing the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be securely attached (such as by wiring) to each polished rod clamp.2 – Example of Product Identification Marking Clamp Nominal Polished Rod Size Load Rating Manufacturer’s Name or Mark Standard Type In.2 Packaging Requirements Polished rod clamps shall be packaged according to the manufacturer’s requirements such that the product will not be damaged during handling. These coatings shall be applied before transportation of the polished rod clamps and shall be maintained during storage. Copyright API.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all polished rod clamps. transportation and storage. Heat Code Month Year 1 --. 11B I 1 /4 40000 --. This document is not an API Standard.2 Additional Industry Markings Additional industry markings. 139 . transportation and storage of all polished rod clamps. a) During all handling.1 Atmospheric Corrosion Protective Coatings An atmospheric corrosion protective coating shall be applied to the polished rod clamp and machined surfaces to prevent atmospheric corrosion during handling. Table K. K. K.7. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. lbs.

It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. K. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. c) Palletized and un-palletized polished rod clamps shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transportation vehicle. 140 .2 Transportation Requirements a) All applicable federal. b) Polished rod clamps shall be separated and stored by clamp type. or impede ingress and egress traffic. Copyright API.7. shall be blocked.6. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized polished rod clamps shall not exceed the manufacturer’s written specifications for transportation of the product. Rust shall be removed with a nonabrasive brush and a suitable atmospheric corrosion protective coating applied (see K.3 Storage Requirements a) The storage of polished rod clamps shall not create hazards. interlocked and limited in height so the tier or stack is stable. All rights reserved. in whole or in part.8 Ordering Information Suggestions for ordering polished rod clamps are as follows: a) Clamp type (indentation or friction). This document is not an API Standard. K.1). c) Packaged polished rod clamps stored in tiers or stacks. K.7. The polished rod clamps shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments. e) Stored polished rod clamps shall be inspected at regular intervals. d) Quantity. polished rod size and load rating. c) Load rating. state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed. b) There shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized polished rod clamps for easy access and safe handling of the product. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. b) Polished rod size. d) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. obstruct access to emergency equipment. one above the other. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.

Annex L (Normative) Calibration of Measuring Equipment L. This document is not an API Standard. These examples however do not include all the equipment required for threaded connections 141 . L. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Additionally. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.2 General All connections shall conform to the gaging practice requirements of API 11B. this document describes basic calibration procedures for gauges and measuring devices. All rights reserved. Copyright API. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. The Manufacturer shall have or have access to the necessary calibrated measuring equipment and shall maintain the equipment in a manner to ensure conformance to this procedure.1 Scope This annex covers calibration of measuring equipment necessary to manufacturer products to this Standard. in whole or in part.

13 Threaded Plug Gauges (straight threads) 4.1.1. made to API Spec 5B and the manufacturer of these products shall meet those requirements in addition to the ones stated in this Standard. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1.4 Measuring Instruments The manufacturer shall own or have access to the necessary measuring instruments and maintain those instruments in such condition to ensure the product dimensions measured as required herein are acceptable under this specification.1 Calibration of Instruments 4.10 Feeler Gauges 4.1. This document is not an API Standard.1.5 Micrometer 4. in whole or in part. All rights reserved.6 Calipers 4.3 Index of Equipment Calibrations 4 Measuring Instruments 4.1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.11 Snap Gauges 4. Measuring instruments should include the following as a minimum: 142 .1.3 Thread Measuring Wires 4.1.2 Gauge Blocks 4.12 Plain Plug Gauges 4.8 Dial Indicators 4.1.1.1.7 Straight Edge (Scale) 4. Copyright API.1.14 Threaded Working Ring Gauges (straight threads) 5 General Information on working gauges and calibration standards 6 Reference Master Gauges L.1.9 Pit Gauge 4. L. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.4 Tape Measure 4.

1.001 in.0254 mm).1.0254 mm).0254 mm). f) Dial indicator or digital indicator . This document is not an API Standard. k) Other measuring instruments are acceptable if capable of measurement precision of 0. d) 6. L.1 Calibration of Instruments L.4. L. working plug gauges or working ring gauges. e) 12.4. These requirements are applicable to all manufacturer’s or third-party laboratories performing calibration of Measurement and Test Equipment (MTE). b) Micrometer capable of measurement precision of 0. (304. (0.4. j) Thread gauges. 0.General Requirements for the Competence of Calibration and Testing Laboratories. (152.1.4. (0.2 Personnel 143 . (0. set plug gauges.001 in.0254 mm). set plug gauges. working plug gauges or working ring gauges. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.0 in.1 Calibrations Calibrations of measuring equipment and gauges may be performed by outside (third party) agencies or by the manufacturer if they can meet the following requirements for calibration. L. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. (0. It cannot act as a calibration laboratory for other companies. Under this Standard. c) Calipers (vernier.4 mm) straight edge.002 in.001 in. unless it is certified under ISO/IEC 17025 as a calibration or testing laboratory for the MTE covered in this standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.8 mm) straight edge.1. (0. These requirements relating to calibration activities are derived from ISO/IEC 17025 . an in-house calibration service shall only provide calibrations for its own facility and facilities operated under the same parent company.001 in.capable of measurement precision of 0. (0. dial or digital) capable of measurement precision of 0.0254 mm).capable of measurement precision of 0. i) Snap gauges (optional based on product).1. h) Feeler gauges.1 General This section provides the minimum requirements for calibration related processes to be applied to calibration of measuring equipment. Copyright API. (mm).0 in. All rights reserved. in whole or in part. a) Tape measure capable of accurately measuring to in.001 in.0508 mm) thickness. g) Pit gauge .

1. National Institute of Standards and Technology in the U. education. training. or longer if required by international.g. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. etc.1.4. b) The manufacturer’s name. Copyright API.1.1. in whole or in part. temperature. acceptance criteria and due date of next calibration. Records of competency.4. This requirement includes control and monitoring of parameters that may affect the quality of calibrations such as humidity. All rights reserved. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. d) Calibration records and procedures shall clearly specify when the instrument was calibrated. Personnel performing calibrations shall perform their assigned duties on a regular basis and records of competency shall be updated once per year as a minimum. Corrective action shall be taken before proceeding with calibrations. 144 . etc. calibration results including as found condition and adjustments made. national or local standards. c) Calibration date. demonstrating qualification of calibration personnel shall be maintained for a minimum of five years.5 Record Retention Records related to the operation of an in house calibration service shall be kept a minimum five (5) years. skills.1. by a signatory of the ILAC MRA or by a National Metrology Institute. vibration.1. L. copies of certificates. such as NIST. when the instrument was put in service and when the calibration of the instrument expires.3 Calibration Sources The calibration standards shall be calibrated a minimum of once per year and are to be calibrated by a calibration service provider that is accredited to ISO Standard 17025.4.4. L. are required to ensure the competency of personnel who perform calibrations.4.7 Environmental Control Calibration services shall maintain appropriate environmental conditions as specified by documented calibration procedures or methods being applied to assure the correct performance of calibrations. Records shall be maintained to demonstrate compliance with this requirement.S. L. an assigned identification number or model and serial number. L. Calibrations shall be halted when the environmental conditions may jeopardize the results of the calibrations.1. internal or external. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.) Evidence of accreditation by a signatory of the ILAC MRA is considered to meet the requirements of measurement traceability. The calibration records shall include at least the following: a) Identity of the item. L. Calibration laboratories.6 Measurement Traceability All calibration equipment shall be calibrated using measurement standards traceable to SI units through a national metrology institute (e.1.4 Calibration Standards The calibration standards used for the calibration systems shall be calibrated or verified a minimum of once per year to maintain precision and traceability. The in-house calibration service shall have access to the Certificate of Accreditation and Calibration Scope of Accreditation from the accreditation organization.1.1.

L. Copyright API. h) Due date of next calibration. l) Reject as out of tolerance. There shall be effective separation between neighboring areas in which there are incompatible activities. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. L.4. e) The serial number (trace markings) of the instrument. or other recognized specifications. f) Date of previous calibration. These records typically detail the responsibility/authority of In-house calibration services personnel. Procedures shall be controlled. calibrations. and test results. available and applied to ensure the integrity of administrative duties. m) Requires notification to manufacturing to re-inspect product produced using the instrument or gauge since previous calibration. in whole or in part. if applicable. These procedures shall be available to personnel performing in-house calibrations. This document is not an API Standard. g) Date of current calibration.1. instructions for performing calibrations and procedures for handling/processing calibration work.1. regional or national standards.8 Calibration Methods and Procedures Calibration laboratories shall have documented methods and procedures for all calibrations that are performed.9 Calibration Records Calibration records maintained by calibration services shall as a minimum state: a) The type of instrument being calibrated.1. i) Measurements as found and recorded per procedures. that contain sufficient and concise information on how to perform the tests and/or calibrations do not need to be supplemented or rewritten as internal procedures. manuals and other information regarding the use of calibration standards shall be available and up-to-date. j) Previous measurements. 145 . All rights reserved. d) The serial number (trace markings) of the calibration standards or set plug used to perform the calibration. International. All instructions. b) The procedure and revision for the method of calibration.1. if applicable. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. k) Acceptable without adjustment or requires adjustment. c) Environmental conditions during the calibrations. damaged or cannot be adjusted.4.

3 Thread Measuring Wires Thread measuring wires for the use in calibration of thread plugs shall be certified by an approved agency and shall meet the requirements of ASME B89. Due to the nature of calipers the ranges can fluctuate or in the case of digital calipers can be zeroed at any point of the scale.5 Micrometer Micrometers shall be calibrated at three equidistant points within the range of the micrometer. If a caliper is regularly used in a 146 .4. in whole or in part.1. n) Identification of person performing the work. leading to a great amount of error. 50% and 75% of the range are typically used).4.10 Control of Non-Conforming Measuring Equipment MTE found to be out of tolerance shall be removed from service and reviewed for rework or replacement. L. is less than 1/32” the tape measure can be approved as compliant for this standard.1. they shall never be used for final acceptance of a product.4.1. L.1.1. If a micrometer is regularly used in a specific limited range it shall be checked at that specific range as well as being checked at the standard locations to insure the lead screw has not worn excessively in the high use areas. at locations other than the minimum and maximum (25%.4. If total deviation in measurement. When MTE is found to be out of tolerance. Additionally. and o) Notes if required. All rights reserved.4 Tape Measure Tape measures shall be verified for the first one (1) inch.1. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. calibrating the OD blades of the caliper does not insure the calibration of the ID blades of the caliper. This document is not an API Standard. at locations other than the minimum and maximum (25%.9.4. 50% and 75% of the range are typically used).1. Copyright API.1.2 Gauge Blocks Calibration standards (gauge blocks) for use in calibrating measuring instruments shall be certified by an approved agency and shall meet the requirements of ASME B89. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.17. as measured with standards with measurement precision of 0.4.1. L. a documented review is required to determine the effect the instrument had on product acceptability for service and use and the actions taken by the manufacturer to insure products produced with the instrument met the requirements of the standard. L. Records shall be kept on the actions taken. L.001” or better.6 Calipers Calipers shall only be used as reference measuring instruments. two (2) inches and three (3) inches of measurement. L. Calipers shall be calibrated at three equidistant points within the range of the caliper. The ID blades shall be calibrated separately. The end tab should be fixed so as to not allow variation in measurements.

half of which is applied to 147 . L. in whole or in part.1. The gauge anvils are set using gauge blocks stacked to the desired size.7 Straight Edge (Scale) Straight edges (scales) as used for this standard are required in lengths of 6” and 12”. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1. Snap gauges are a great tool for rapidly inspecting/evaluating within a set range. and a base for zeroing and aligning to the surface to make the measurement. The minimum width of any anvils on snap gauges for 11B products shall be 1/4" and the maximum width shall be less than the maximum value of the attribute being measured.10 Feeler Gauges Feeler gauge material is normally precision ground material supplied in strips or bands of stock. The indicators shall be calibrated as stated for indicators above. L. The allowable variation in parallelism between the gauge and the face of the part is 0.002. All rights reserved.4. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.4.4.0002 or better. L. so feeler gauges shall be verified with an instrument with measurement precision of 0. specific limited range it shall be checked at that specific ranges as well as being checked at the standard locations to insure the instrument has not worn excessively in the high use areas. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.001 tolerance would require plain plugs with a tolerance of 0.1. but being a go/not go check only. so a part with a 0. L.12 Plain Plug Gauges Plain plug gauges are used to inspect/evaluate internal diameters and are of a Go/Not Go design. Copyright API.1.8 Dial Indicators Dial indicators shall be calibrated at three equidistant points within the range of the indicator at locations other than the minimum and maximum (25%.4.001 is 0. It may be desirable to set the go/not go range to be tighter than the allowed product tolerance to allow for indicating when a product is reaching a limit. they will not alert a machinist/inspector when they are approaching a maximum or minimum limit. Feeler gauges shall be maintained within a 10:1 ratio to the tolerance of the part being evaluated.00005 (10% of 0. Plain plugs shall be maintained within a 10:1 ratio to the tolerance of the part being evaluated.1. L.1.11 Snap Gauges Snap gauges are typically C-shaped frames with one fixed anvil and two adjustable anvils which are used to set a range for both Go and Not-Go measurements. This document is not an API Standard.0001. 50% and 75% of the range are typically used). L. If a dial indicator is regularly used in a specific limited range it shall be checked at that range as well as being checked at the standard locations to insure the instrument has not worn excessively in the high use areas. Plain plug gauges are calibrated per ASME B89.9 Pit Gauge A pit gauge is typically a depth indicator that has a tip tapered to a point or a ball tip approximately 1/64”-1/32” diameter.5.4.1.4. Measurement precision shall be established to within +/.1/32”.

the go plug and half to the not go plug). Once accepted.4.1. (0. to the requirements of API 11AX and API 11B. Adjustable ring gauges are subject to losing the proper setting due to minor drops or collisions but can be reset. The calibration of threaded ring gauges is accomplished by using a mating set plug gauge.00047 in. or to a combined change of 0. center and back of the plug shall be within the tolerance limits as specified in the appropriate standard.4.13 Threaded Plug Gauges (straight threads) Threaded plug gauges are used to inspect/evaluate internal diameters and are of a Go/Not Go design for initial acceptance the plugs must meet all thread specification requirements. in whole or in part.1 This is equivalent to a decrease in cone base diameter of 0. Copyright API.0019 mm) on plug. but once worn beyond the gauge tolerance must be replaced and are typically more expensive than adjustable rings. All rights reserved.14.00047 in.1. with each having different advantages and disadvantages. For initial acceptance the rings must meet all thread specification requirements found in API 11AX and API 11B. center and back of the plug shall be within the tolerance limits as specified in the appropriate standard. Working plugs and set plugs shall be considered to be satisfactory for continued use if they conform to the above stated requirements upon re-inspection. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. which shall not vary by more than 0. The working set plug shall be calibrated annually at a minimum. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.119 mm) on ring.00047 in.1.1. The axial variation of shoulder face of go thread plug gauges shall be within the limits shown in in the appropriate standard.0119 mm). Cone plug gauges (B4) shall be checked for standoff to their Reference Master gauge. Solid ring gauges will not fall out of tolerance due to minor drops or collisions. (0. as measured at two points 90º apart from each other at the front. and last much longer because they are adjustable and when worn can be reset to the correct tolerance. the minimum requirements for re-inspection of threaded working plug and threaded set plugs are: The pitch diameter of go and no-go working plug and set plug gauges. (0. or to an increase of 0. Gauges that are not bi-directional (typically taperlock style plugs) shall be rejected if the front or center measurements are found to be worn outside of the acceptable range. This document is not an API Standard. The major diameter of go working plug gauges and the full form major diameter of go and no go set plug gauges. as measured at two points 90º apart from each other at the front. NOTE L.038 mm) from the original value.1 Threaded Working Ring Gauges (Solid non-adjustable) 148 . it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. L. solid and adjustable. L. NOTE L. per 4.14 Threaded Working Ring Gauges (straight threads) Threaded ring gauges are of two types.2 11B gauges given as examples but applies to all straight threads L.4.0015 in. Plain gauges that can be reversed (typically reversible or trilock style plugs) may continue to be used as long as one end and the center measurements remain within standard. (0.

1. it may be advisable to clamp the handle of the setting plug in a vise.1. L. nicks or burrs.14. nicks or burrs and note the condition of seals.14.2 Threaded Ring Gauges (Adjustable) L. that the pitch diameter. L.4.4.4. Lubricate the set plug with a thin film of light oil. Depending on the size. Shake or play indicates a bellmouth or tapered condition and the ring should be reworked or replaced.1.4. Remove rust and/or burrs.1. inspect it for nicks or damage.4.1. The fit should remain consistent with the fit felt on the original side to assure proper straightness.14.1 Examine the ring for evidence of rust.14.4. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. The degree of drag is somewhat subjective.1. If the rust or corrosion is too extensive to be removed or if nicks or burrs are still present which will interfere with proper setting of the ring.1.4.1.14.1. If possible.1.3 Turn the ring across the truncated section and the full form section of the setting plug.1. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. it does not assure that they are each within tolerances). with a high degree of probability.2 Ensure that the set plug is clean.14. L.6 To check for bellmouth or taper. If the rust or corrosion is too extensive to be removed or if nicks or burrs are still present which will interfere with proper verification of the ring. reject the ring and proceed no further.2. it may be advisable to clamp the handle of the setting plug in a vise. If the ring is significantly looser on the truncated portion or if it won’t go on to the full-form portion. Copyright API. L.1.4.14.1. Remove rust and/or burrs. Do not attempt to force the ring across the full form portion of the set plug as damage to the crest of the set plug may occur.14. inspect it for nicks or damage.1. There should be no significant change in the degree of drag from one section to the other. This document is not an API Standard.4. L. The degree of drag for a small ring should be less than that for a large ring but in no case should the ring spin freely nor should it be so tight as to cause unnecessary wear or damage to the set plug. and verify that it is within tolerance.1 Examine the ring for evidence of rust. screw the set plug into the ring without using excessive force.4.14.2. Lubricate the set plug with a thin film of light oil. L. noting the degree of drag as you go. L. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.4.7 The final step in verifying the calibration for the solid ring is inspecting/evaluating the minor diameter of the threads with a plain plug gauge or measuring the minor diameter using an appropriate measuring device. If within tolerance the gauge is acceptable to place back into service (use). All rights reserved. Depending on the size. insert the set plug 1½ to 2 turns into the ring and note if there is any shake or play.1. it should be reworked or replaced.1. corrosion. corrosion. and verify that it is within tolerance. to assess condition of the thread in the ring per steps 6 through 9. flank angles and lead of the ring are within tolerances (while this indicates with a high degree of probability that the lead and flank angles are acceptable.2.14. 149 .4 A satisfactory fit on both the full-form and truncated portions of the set plug indicates. reject the ring and proceed no further.1. L.2 Ensure that the set plug is clean. L. in whole or in part.3 To determine the “as received” condition measure the minor diameter and record the reading.1.14. L.5 Remove the set plug from the ring and insert the set plug into the other side of the ring.

Repeat the setting procedure. or measuring the minor diameter using an appropriate measuring device. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Turn the locking screw clockwise until it is tight and rotate the ring to assure the proper fit. The degree of drag is somewhat subjective.4. Turn the adjusting screw counter-clockwise until there is a slight drag between the set plug and ring. and with the set plug still inserted. Working ring gauges.7 Remove the set plug from the ring and insert the set plug into the other side of the ring. shall be calibrated with a working set plug which has been calibrated as listed above. The fit should remain consistent with the fit felt on the original side to assure proper straightness.4. This operation may have to be repeated more than once to obtain and maintain the proper degree of drag. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. it does not assure that they are each within tolerances.14. All rights reserved.5 General Information on working gauges and calibration standards Working plug gauges and set plug gauges shall be checked per the requirements of API 11B. Make the adjustments for proper fit as above. There should be no significant change in the degree of drag.4.4. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise. There should be only a slight change or no change of fit from the full-form portion to the truncated portion.1.2.2. 150 . If within tolerance the gauge is acceptable to place back into service (use). L.14.14. Some may find it easier to reverse the procedure and turn the ring on to the set plug until the truncated portion of the set plug is fully engauged.6 Reference Master Gauges Reference Master Gauges cannot not be calibrated in a factory setting. L. If the degree of drag changes after tapping.2. The degree of drag for a small ring should be less than that for a large ring but in no case should the ring spin freely nor should it be so tight as to cause unnecessary wear or damage to the set plug.2.4 When necessary remove the sealing wax and turn the locking screw counter-clockwise until it is loose. turn the ring across the truncated portion of the set plug.8 To check for bellmouth or taper. in whole or in part. L. flank angles and lead of the ring are within tolerances (while this indicates with a high degree of probability that the lead and flank angles are acceptable. that the pitch diameter. Working thread gauges shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances stipulated in API 11AX and 11B.5 Turn the ring all the way on to the full form section of the setting plug. After adjusting.1.1. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. In some cases a small screwdriver may need to be levered into the adjustment slot to facilitate the opening of the ring as you turn the adjusting screw.9 The final step in verifying the calibration for the adjustable ring is inspecting/evaluating the minor diameter of the threads with a plain plug gauge.14.6 Once set correctly on the full form. L. If the ring will not go across the full-form portion the ring should be reworked or replaced.2.14. Shake or play indicates a bellmouth or tapered condition and the ring should be reworked or replaced.4. This document is not an API Standard. tap the ring with a soft-tipped hammer to properly seat the threads. L. until the set plug enters freely.1.1.1. L. Thread wires and gauge blocks shall be calibrated by a laboratory accredited by a signatory of the ILAC MRA at a minimum of once per year. details for calibration can be found in the appropriate specifications. Copyright API. If the ring becomes significantly looser on the truncated portion it should be reworked or replaced. A satisfactory fit on both the full-form and truncated portions of the set plug indicates. Do not attempt to force the ring across the full form portion of the set plug as damage to the crest of the set plug may occur. with a high degree of probability. L. which opens up the ring. insert the set plug 1½ to 2 turns into the ring and note if there is any shake or play. the ring was not properly seated.2.4. Once properly set to the truncated portion turn the ring across the full- form portion.14. L.

and Couplings and Sub-couplings) M.2 General Mechanical properties testing shall be performed in accordance to the requirements of this Annex for steel sucker rods and pony rods. FRP end fittings. sinker bars. Sinker Bars. polished rods. All rights reserved. FRP End Fittings. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Polished Rods. This Annex defines the methods that manufacturers shall adhere to in qualifying these products to API 11B. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. ANNEX M (Normative) Standard Method of Mechanical Properties Testing of Products Made from Bar Stock and Tubing (Steel Sucker Rods and Pony Rods. M. polished rods. and couplings and sub-couplings. This Annex provides the standard methodology to insure consistent testing between manufacturers and third party metallurgical 151 . and couplings and sub-couplings. sinker bars.1 Scope This Standard pertains to the mechanical properties testing for steel sucker rods and pony rods. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. FRP end fittings. Copyright API. in whole or in part.

M. after final heat treatment or spray metal coating.3 Chemical Property Requirements Chemical properties shall meet the requirements in the applicable product annex for the grade specified. forged. Copyright API. Specimens for testing may be either full diameter or machined test specimens of Type A. M. spray metal coated or raw materials received without mechanical properties from a supplier shall be tested for conformance to this standard. Manufacturers shall provide evidence that mechanical properties. Products that have been hot worked. When testing is required. heat treated. testing laboratories. Manufacturers shall develop and maintain a written procedure for qualification of testing laboratories including annual requalification of the laboratory.5 Minimum Procedure(s) Requirements a) Sample selection and preparation for testing b) Testing process c) Reporting of results d) Record retention and retrieval e) Personnel qualifications 152 . Type C or Type D as outlined in this annex by product. hardness requirements are not specified for any of these product that are not case hardened as it could affect acceptance or rejection criteria that have yet to be established as an industry and should be established by the manufacturer. are met in accordance with the requirements of the applicable product annex. The correlation between mechanical properties of products in the hot rolled condition as compared to the mechanical properties of products processed through different heat treatment methods can vary greatly. The chemical composition for each grade manufactured shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6. this annex defines the methods used to determine compliance to the standard.2. Higher yield strength to tensile strength ratios and refinement of the grain size along with different microstructures can lead to different relationships of hardness to strength. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.3. Hardness test equipment requires verification and documenting of calibration using certified standards prior to testing to qualify product. Users of this annex are responsible to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations and shall establish appropriate procedures to meet the stated requirements that also include safety and health practices.4 Mechanical Property Requirements Mechanical properties testing is required to ensure compliance of products to API 11B. This document is not an API Standard. M.2. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Testing laboratories either on site at the manufacturer or by a service supply organization or outside laboratory shall maintain the calibration of Ultimate Tensile Machines and hardness testing equipment with calibration cycles no longer than one year and traceability to NIST or equivalent national standards agency. All rights reserved. Users of this document are directed to ISO/IEC 17025 when there may be a need for information on criteria for evaluation of testing laboratories. Type B. in whole or in part. Because of the factors involved in this interrelationship. It is the governing method of testing for compliance to API 11B for the products listed. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.

1mm) shall have the specimen taken half way between the outer diameter and center of the bar (See figure 4).4 FRP End Fittings FRP end fittings shall use Type B specimens taken from the center of the bar for sizes up to and including 1.7.7. M. Bar stock greater than 1. Copyright API. optional or when required by the product Annex M.5mm) h) Hardness.1mm) in diameter.7 Product Sampling Methods See each product annex for details of the requirements for process validation when products are spray metal coated. M. 153 .3 Sinker Bars Sinker bars shall be tested using Type B specimens when MTR’s are not provided by the mill. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.7. M.5 inches (38. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.g. M. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2. M.500 inches (12. M. reported as either minimum or in 0. couplings and polished rods that have MTR’s for pre spray metal condition).6 Testing Product testing shall occur after final heat treatment and result in reporting the following: a) Product b) All necessary trace information c) Type and size of specimen d) Yield strength.2 Polished Rods Polished rods shall be tested using Type A test specimens if the mechanical properties are not provided on the Mill MTR.7. All rights reserved.7.2% offset e) Ultimate tensile strength f) Reduction of Area % g) Elongation % in 8 inches (200mm) for full body specimens and Type A specimens or in 2 inches for Type B specimens machined to 0. The product annex may allow for the user to establish correlations between hardness and mechanical properties (e.5 inches (38.1 Sucker Rods Sucker rods shall be tested using full body diameter test specimens.1 Spray Metal Coated Polished Rods Spray metal coated polished rods shall be tested using Type A test specimens.

5.5 in. Type C and Type D.8. (0.5 thru 2. When used for standard polished rods it is acceptable to take a sample from anywhere in the body.7.. the machined area shall not have a surface finish greater than 125 micro inch R a.) (greater than 1. The acceptable specimen types for testing are listed by product in Table M.1 Full Body Test Specimen A full body section test shall be performed on sucker rod samples up to and including 1-1/8” diameter and optionally for products as listed in Table M.1. 4 ft. M.. M.) (small diameter) (small cross section) Steel Sucker Rods Standard FRP End Fittings Optional Standard Polished Rods Optional Standard Spray Metal Polished Rods Optional Standard Sinker Bars Optional Standard Standard Couplings or Sub-couplings (from bar Standard Standard stock) Couplings or Sub-couplings (from tubing) Standard Standard Spray Metal Coated Couplings or Sub- Standard Standard couplings M.1 – Type of Test Specimens by Product Full Body Type A Test Type B Test Type C Test Type D Test Test Specimen Specimen Specimen Specimen Product Specimen (up to 1. Type B specimens shall be used to test this material with specimens taken from the center of the bar for sizes up to and including 1. For a machined test specimen.7. 154 .0 meter) pony rods). it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Full Body.5 Couplings and Sub-Couplings M. All rights reserved.7. Type B.3 Spray Metal Coated Spray metal coated couplings and sub-couplings from either bar stock or tubing material shall be tested using Type C or Type D specimens. M. or 6 ft.5. Full section samples from sucker rods shall be taken from the body of the rod a minimum of 12 inches (457mm) from the end of the sucker rod after final heat treatment (not applicable to 2 ft.2 Tubing Couplings and sub-couplings manufactured from tubing or heat treated after machining of any of the ID dimensions shall be tested using Type C or Type D specimens. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Copyright API.1mm) shall have the specimen taken half way between the outer diameter and center of the bar (See figure 4) M. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.8 Types of Test Specimens There are 5 types of test specimens used for testing products in this specification.5 inches (38.5 in.1mm) in diameter. This document is not an API Standard.1.5 inches (38. Table M. Bar stock greater than 1. in whole or in part.1 Bar Stock Couplings and sub-couplings manufactured from bar stock that are received with chemical properties but without mechanical properties shall be tested in accordance with this specification provided the material is used in the as bought condition or after final heat treatment occur prior to manufacturing any of the internal dimensions. Type A.5.7. If the product is spray metal coated then the sample shall be taken from within the coated area (it is permissible to prepare test coupons for testing spray metal polished rods instead of destroying actual product).

2 Type A Machined Test Specimen 155 .1 Gauge Marks The sample should be gauge marked with a center punch.1.8.1. M. a sample of at least 24 inches (610mm) in length shall be provided to the laboratory for testing.2 – Full Body Test Specimen with Gauge Marks If the length of the gripping jaws is not known.10mm) Figure M. Figure M.005 inch (0. Copyright API. spaced at 1/2 inch intervals (10 mm for 200 mm measurements) over a length of 10 inches (the jaws gripping just outside the marked areas during the test).1 – Full Body Test Specimen M. The laboratory shall be responsible for adjusting the sample length to fit the tensile test equipment by any method that will not have a negative impact on the test results of the specimen. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved.8. This document is not an API Standard. The length of the sample shall be 10 inches (254mm) for the specimen length between jaws plus the additional length to fit both sets of gripping jaws.2). See Figure M. This will provide the means of measurement of elongation over 8 inches (200mm) when the actual failure point is not yet known (see Figure M. in whole or in part. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. the jaws of the machine shall close on the specimen adjacent to and just outside the 10 inch (254 mm) marks. It is permissible to reduce the diameter of a full body sample so that it has a gradual taper from the 8 inch marks towards the center of the test specimen so long as the diameter is not reduced by more than 0. When the sample is loaded into the tensile machine for testing.

70 1.07 R Radius from turned diameter.50 M.000 102.130 28.33 8.375 9.45 1.00 10. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.00 B Grip length minimum 4.00 4.005 203.500 38.120 28.50 0.00 4.07 7.33 8. 156 . (10mm) increments over 2 in.07 7.00 C Original O.005 203.2 – Type A Specimen Dimension 1-1/8" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" inch mm inch mm inch mm A Length of reduced section minimum 10.995 203. Table M.45 1.70 D Diameter of turned sample minimum 1.500 38.D. of sample reference 1. in whole or in part.000 254. The machined test specimen shall be center turned and maintain the dimensions listed in Table M. Copyright API.000 102.2.3 TYPE B MACHINED SPECIMENS Type B machined test specimen (see Figure M.000 254.10 1.375 9. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.2) are to be used for testing of polished rods. Table M.3 – Type A Machined Test Specimen Table M.3) requirements by product per Table M.50 0.130 28.1.005 203.00 10. This document is not an API Standard.120 28.000 102. Figure M.995 203.10 maximum 1.120 28.500 38.33 G Gauge length minimum 7.10 1.375 9. For machined specimens the gauge marks shall be in ½ in.45 maximum 8.3. (50mm). minimum 0.995 203.70 1.4.130 28.8. All rights reserved. Type A machined test specimen (see Figure M.000 254.

496 12.93 G Gauge length minimum 1.995 50. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.4) requirements by product per Table M.00 1-3/8" (35mm) if threaded.500 12.4 – Type B Machined Test Specimen Table M. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.50 A Length of reduced section minimum 2.005 50. This document is not an API Standard.60 Maximum 2.5. minimum 3⁄8 10. in whole or in part.250 60. per manufacturer specification if B Grip length reference a plain grip 3/4" (20mm) as a plain grip or threaded (Typically 3/4-10 C diameter of turned grip reference (M20x2.506 12.1 are standard for couplings that have the internal diameter machined.3 – Type B Specimen Dimensions in. mm Nominal Diameter 0.5)). Figure M.85 D Diameter of turned sample minimum 0. Copyright API.4 TYPE C MACHINED TEST SPECIMENS Type C machined test specimen (see Figure M. are made from tubular material or for testing spray metal couplings.8. All rights reserved. Table M.00 M. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.67 L Overall length minimum Per manufacturer specification R Radius from turned diameter. 157 . Maximum 0.

outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. mm Nominal Diameter 0. in whole or in part.501 12.000 50.15 158 .50 0.12 0.75 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. All rights reserved.005" (0. Copyright API.227 5.0. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.000 25.13mm) 0.4 – Type C Specimen Dimensions TYPE C SPECIMEN DIMENSIONS in.00 1.50 0.500 12. mm Nominal Diameter 0. This document is not an API Standard.250 6.701 17. mm in.13mm) 2. D Diameter of turned sample +/.350 8.351 8.5 – Type D Specimen Dimensions TYPE D SPECIMEN DIMENSIONS in.114 2. mm in.00 0.50 G Gauge length +/.00 0.501 12. are made from tubular material or for testing spray metal couplings.640 16.70 A Length of reduced section minimum 2.25 0. Table M.5 A Length of reduced section minimum 2-1⁄4 60 1-3⁄4 45 1-1⁄4 32 3⁄4 20 5⁄8 16 B Grip length reference Per manufacturer specification C diameter of turned grip reference Per manufacturer specification.001 25. Figure M.0. as a plain grip or threaded.250 57. minimum 3⁄8 10 1⁄4 6 3⁄16 5 5⁄32 4 3⁄32 2 Z Wall thickness of sample Maximum 1.00 M.1 are standard for couplings that have the internal diameter machined.160 4 0.56 0.5 – Type C Machined Test Specimen Table M.251 6.5) requirements by product per Table M.00 0.75 0. In all cases special test coupons will need to be prepared as standard product length is too short for proper gripping.00 1.450 10.00 L Overall length minimum Per manufacturer specification R Radius from turned diameter.5 0. mm in.5 TYPE D MACHINED TEST SPECIMENS Type D machined test specimen (see Figure M.25 0.005" (0.8.400 35. Figure M.00 0.161 4.113 2.6. Manufacturers shall develop procedures and specifications that define the length of the grip (G) and overall length of test specimens.500 12. mm in.321 8.6 – Type D Machined Test Specimen Table M.

095 2.31 8 0.2 0.11 2.14 3. in whole or in part.005 50.93 G Gauge length minimum 1.6 – Free-running Rate of Separation of the Crossheads in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm A Dimension 5/8 16 3/4 20 1 1/4 32 1 3/4 45 2 1/4 60 10 254 Maximum Rate of speed (A*1/16".01 0.5 1. B Grip length Per manufacturer specification C diameter of turned grip reference 0.9 from 50% of yield A*1. When this point is reached.88 22.59 mm) per minute and shall not exceed 1⁄2 inches (12. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Copyright API. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.10 Required Reporting From Testing M.300 7.1 0.6 (Max*0.06 1. especially for materials which are highly strain rate sensitive. This speed shall be maintained through the yield point or yield strength. All rights reserved.38 10 0.06 2 0.63 15.67 T Thickness of sample minimum 0. tensile strength and elongation values.1) M. minimum 0.3 0.5mm) through tensile strength per Minimum 0.6 0.4 0.67 L Overall length Per manufacturer specification R Radius from turned diameter. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.35 Maximum 0.13 30 5 127 from yield strength A*12. the free- running rate of separation of the heads shall not be less than 1/16 inches (1. Any convenient speed of testing may be used up to one-half the specified yield point or yield strength. In determining the tensile strength.250 6.08 2.41 Z Wall thickness of product Per 11B M. This document is not an API Standard. through Minimum yield strength 0.1) Maximum Rate of speed (A*1/2". Elongation values generally decrease as the strain rate increases.095 2.04 1.67 W Width of sample minimum 0.9 SPEED OF TESTING Changes in the strain rate can affect the yield strength.2 0.105 2. although the effect on tensile strength is generally less pronounced.10.01 0.59 mm) per minute per inch of reduced section (Dimension A in Tables 2 thru 5) for test specimens.01 0. Table M. the free-running rate of separation of the crossheads shall be adjusted so as not to exceed 1⁄16 inches (1.04 1 0. In general.1 Yield Strength 159 . the yield strength and tensile strength will increase with increasing strain rate.7 mm) per minute per inch of reduced section (Dimension A in Tables 2 thru 5) for test specimens (Table 6).01 0.63 16 0.0 0.50 13 minute (Max*0.995 50.105 2.03 1 0.0 0.59mm) strength.41 Maximum 0.62 Maximum 2. 0.1 0.09 2 0.8 0. 0.01 0.11 3 0.05 1.

10. In all cases of determining Yield strength. Users of this annex shall as part of the reporting state the method used. After tensile failure. 0.2% offset). 8 inch (200mm) extensometer e) Yield strength. If any part of the fracture takes place outside of the middle half of the gauge length or in a punched or scribed mark. and measure and record the distance between coinciding punch marks (Figure 7). discard the test and retest 160 . If the elongation so measured meets the minimum requirements specified. no further testing is indicated for elongation. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Yield stress can be reported as minimum yield strength or yield strength (0. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. the elongation value obtained may not be representative of the material. an 8 in.02% offset. 0. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. stress/strain (S/S) diagram c) Yield strength. 2 inch (50mm) extensometer M. certain materials and heat treatment methods create results that are very defined.02% offset. The yield strength may alternately be measured using Halt of Force (HOF) method.2 Tensile Strength The ultimate tensile strength (UTS) is the maximum stress level reached in a tension test. Copyright API. extensometer is used. but if the elongation is less than the minimum requirement. 0. Halt of Force (HOF) d) Yield strength. Examples of reporting include: a) Yield strength. minimum. Stress/ Strain (S/S) diagram b) Yield strength. Yield strength is the amount of stress at which plastic deformation becomes noticeable and significant. Additionally. M. fit the ends of the fractured sample together. (200mm) extensometer shall be used full body and Type A specimens and for Type B specimens a 2 in.3 Elongation Elongation is measured at 8 inch (200mm) intervals for full body and Type A specimens and 2 inches (50mm) Type B and Type D specimens and per Table M. minimum. When extensometers are used.4 for Type C specimens.10. the method shall be reported. Many modern Ultimate Tensile Machine (UTM) systems can automatically detect the yield point and can plot a corresponding stress/strain diagram from the system software. When using other methods to determine the yield strength it should be understood that results may vary and some variation in the reported strength can occur if another laboratory uses a different method to determine the yield strength.02% offset. All rights reserved. This document is not an API Standard. in whole or in part.

in. or mm M.7 – Measuring Elongation Calculate the elongation using the following equation: Where: %EL = elongation. The difference between the areas found divided by the area of the original cross section expressed as a percentage of the original area is the reduction of area. and Df = failure diameter M. or mm lo = original length. Optionally. in. a) Sample description. This document is not an API Standard. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.Df )/ Do ) *100 where: Do =original diameter . All rights reserved. Calculate the reduction of area using one of the following equations: % ROA= ((Ao – Af)/ Ao)*100 where: Af =area of failure. Copyright API. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. the difference of the original diameter squared minus the failure diameter squared.11 Documentation M. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.10. and Ao =original diameter 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 % ROA= ((Do .1 Required Documentation The following values shall be reported on the test results. and expressed as a percentage of the original area is the reduction of area. divided by the original diameter squared. in whole or in part. Figure M. percent lf = failure length.4 Reduction of Area Reduction of Area (ROA) shall be measured by fitting the ends of the fractured specimen together and measuring the mean diameter at the smallest cross section to the same accuracy as the original diameter. 161 .11.

mechanical damage or characteristics that occur from testing (such as a crack opening in the material). b) Any unique observations of the specimen prior to. Copyright API. (Manufacturer’s trace code) d) Date. a) Hardness.11. g) Tensile strength. during or after testing such as corrosion present. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. All rights reserved. c) Identification code. e) Batch (defined by date/time of heat treatment) f) Yield strength and method.2 Additional Product Annex Requirements Additionally the following items may be recorded optionally unless required by the product annex. h) Elongation i) Reduction of Area. in whole or in part. This document is not an API Standard. 162 . it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. b) Sample type. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. M.

2 Design Requirements The following requirements shall be followed in the design of polished rod liners.1 General Steel polished rod liners shall be spray metal coated. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. This document is not an API Standard. Copyright API. The polished rod liner installs over the polished rod and provides a hard. N. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.1 General Polished rod liners shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the requirements in this Standard. Annex N (Informative) Polished Rod Liners N. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. 163 . All rights reserved. smooth wearing surface. N.2. in whole or in part.

2 Dimensional Requirements Polished rod liners shall be furnished in the sizes shown in Table N.1 – Polished Rod Liner N.3 Material Requirements N. Size of Polished Rod With Which Used.45 1 1/2 38. N. Outside Diameter a For Reference Only in. Spray metal polished rod liners. or by using a commercial thickness tester. mm 1. N. Table N.05 mm).3 Spray Metal Coating Requirements Base metal shall be prepared prior to the application of the spray metal coating in accordance with the manufacturer’s documented procedure to assure adequate bonding. Examples of effective surface preparation procedures are specified in SSPC-SP 5/NACE No.750 44.500 38.1 – Polished Rod Liner Sizes Polished Rod Liner Size.003 in. Acceptance of hardness testing shall be based on one test coupon per lot of powder used in the spray metal process.1.51 mm) per side. in whole or in part. All rights reserved.10 11/4 31. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. as verified by diameter measurements before and after spray metal coating. This document is not an API Standard. (0. or SSPC-SP11. The manufacturer shall provide the minimum and maximum liner thickness for each liner size provided. / . Spray metal coating thickness shall be 0.75 1.0. or spray metal test coupons shall be hardness tested using the Vickers micro hardness procedure with 200 gm load per ASTM E384 or equivalent Knoop hardness.15 mm to 0. (+ 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.10 a Tolerance on OD is + 0.375 34. Spray metal coating hardness shall be 480 HV200 minimum or equivalent Knoop hardness.2.0.58 1.1 Chemical Composition 164 . 1. Copyright API. mm in. to 0.08 mm / .006 in.3.002 in. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Figure N.93 1 1/8 28. Length and configuration are optional with the manufacturer.2.020 in.

N.). outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. exposure to hydrogen sulfide environments. and state the operating environment for each specific assembly (e. Hydrostatic test for the polished rod liner body shall be 4 ft. The manufacturer shall test the various seal systems possible for each polished rod liner and size.1 Seal Section The manufacturer shall define documented recommendation for the polished rod liner assembly. in length and shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s written procedures and acceptance criteria defined below. Do not start the timing until the test pressure (2 times the working pressure) has been reached.2. The tests shall be conducted according to the acceptance criteria defined below with the results documented. 165 . N. All rights reserved.4.4.1 Body Pressure Rating The design for the available thicknesses for each liner size shall have the body pressure rating validated by conducting a hydrostatic test at two times the rated working pressure for the liner body by pressurizing against closed end caps. the equipment and the pressure-monitoring gauge have been isolated from the pressure source and the external surfaces of the body members have been thoroughly dried. N.1 Design Validation Each polished rod liner design by size shall be hydrostatic tested to validate the body pressure rating and the static seal system leak pressure. 2) Reduction of pressure to zero.2 Mechanical Properties The body pressure rating and the static seal system leak pressure of the assembly after spray metal coating shall be furnished by the manufacturer. high water cuts. The total test volume of water. volatile organic compounds. for the hydrostatic test shall not exceed 3 times the normal volume between the polished rod and the polished rod liner. Copyright API.2. N. Polished rod liners shall conform to the chemical composition requirements specified by the manufacturer. N.1. once isolated.2 Static Seal System Leak Test The system used to seal the liner on the respective polished rod size shall be tested by conducting a hydrostatic test to determine the minimum pressure at which the seal will leak while properly installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. The test results shall be documented.3. in whole or in part.1.3. The chemical composition shall be detailed in the material specification of the manufacturer and shall be traceable to the material test report (MTR) conforming to the requirements in 6. etc. Both pressure holding periods shall not be less than 3 minutes. No visible leakage of the liner body shall occur during each holding period. 3) A second application of 2 times the working pressure during the holding period.3. 1) The first application of 2 times the working pressure during the holding period.g.4 Inspecting and Testing Requirements N. This document is not an API Standard. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard..4.1. including seal section. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.

It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. to 32 μin.813 μm) Ra. at the option of the manufacturer.2 Dimensional Inspection Dimensional inspection of polished rod liners shall be performed in accordance with Table N.1. Copyright API. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.1 Polished Rod Liner Product Identification Markings As a minimum. (0. the following product identification markings shall be applied. which is permanently attached by the manufacturer. on the external head (cap) or nameplate. 2) Reduction of pressure to zero.4. low stress permanent markings or any combination.5 Marking Requirements Polished rod liners shall be permanently and legibly marked.3 Surface Finish Surface finish roughness of polished rod liners shall be checked with a surface finish gauge such as a profilometer or a comparator and shall have a surface finish of 8 μin. Hydrostatic test for the polished rod liner body shall be 4 ft. 11B. The total test volume of water. N. 3) A second application of static seal system pressure rating during the holding period.5. Both pressure holding periods shall not be less than 3 minutes. b) Standard. c) Nominal OD d) Polished Rod Size f) Length 166 . No pressure drop or visible leakage of the seal system shall occur during each holding period.4. N. All rights reserved. a) Manufacturer’s name or mark. in length and shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s written procedures and acceptance criteria defined below. The test results shall be documented. forged.203 μm to 0. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Do not start the timing until the seal system rating pressure has been reached. Hydrostatic test shall consist of: 1) The first application of static seal system pressure rating during the holding period. die stamped. laser engraving. in whole or in part. in any order. Methods of markings shall include cast. This document is not an API Standard. N. the equipment and the pressure-monitoring gauge have been isolated from the pressure source and the external surfaces of the body members have been thoroughly dried. N. once isolated. for the hydrostatic test shall not exceed 3 times the normal volume between the polished rod and the polished rod liner.

outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. N. a) During all handling. h) Seal system leak pressure in psi (Mpa). x 14 ft polished rod liner manufactured in February 2017 with a body working pressure rating of 2. in whole or in part.5. chronologically. g) Body working pressure in psi (Mpa).000 psi --. i) Month of manufacture: the month of manufacture shall be designated by the numerals 01 through 12. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.1 Polished Rod Liner Diameter The manufacturer shall provide a non-damaging. care shall be exercised to prevent the polished rod liner from contacts which might cause damage to the product. x 1 1/4 in.7 Handling.1 Example of Product Identification Markings for Polished Rod Liners A 1 1/2 in. Copyright API.000 psi (6.7. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.89 Mpa) shall be marked as follows: Table N. transportation and storage operations.2 Additional Industry Markings Other additional markings are allowed and may be applied as desired by the manufacturer or as requested by the user or purchaser. N. but shall be applied in addition to the markings specified above. 02 17 N.000 psi (13.000 psi 1. b) There shall be sufficient clearance around palletized and un-palletized polished rod liners for easy access and safe handling.6 Finished Product Packaging Requirements The following general requirements shall be followed in the finished product requirements of all polished rod liners. j) Year of manufacture: the year of manufacture shall be designated by the last two numerals of the year.5. removable sleeve or tube to protect the polished rod liner assembly from physical damage during normal handling. with January represented as number 01. transportation and storage of all polished rod liner assemblies.1 General Requirements These general requirements shall be followed for the handling.79 Mpa) and a system leak pressure rating of 1. Transportation and Storage of Finished Products N.6. A Label shall be provided on the removable sleeve or tube to identify the product.1. This document is not an API Standard. transportation and storage.2 – Example of Product Identification Marking Manufacturer’s name or mark Standard Size Body Working Pressure System Leak Pressure Heat Code Month Year 1 1 --. N. All rights reserved. N. 167 . 11B 1 /2 x 1 /4 x 14 2.

in whole or in part. body and seal system leak pressure. or impede ingress and egress traffic. self-supporting and secure against sliding or collapse. The polished rod liners shall be stored in such locations and in such a manner as to minimize deterioration from exposure to corrosive environments. c) Palletized and un-palletized polished rod liners shall be adequately restrained and the weight properly distributed for the transportation vehicle. Copyright API.2 Transportation Requirements a) All applicable federal. b) The height and weight of palletized and/or un-palletized polished rod liners shall not exceed the manufacturer’s written specifications for transportation of the product. N. This document is not an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. b) Polished rod liners shall be separated and stored by size. when applicable. interlocked and limited in height so the tier or stack is stable. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. e) Quantity.7. state and local transportation laws and regulations shall be obeyed.3 Storage Requirements a) The storage of polished rod liners shall not create hazards. All rights reserved. N. obstruct access to emergency equipment.8 Ordering Information Suggestions for ordering polished rod liners are listed below: a) Size (outside diameter) b) Customer specified material requirements. N. d) The manufacturer shall develop a procedure to define the safe storage stacking height. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.7. one above the other. c) Packaged polished rod liners stored in tiers or stacks. Annex O (informative) 168 . c) Liner head configuration d) Length. shall be blocked.

3 – forging defect in the face of the pin shoulder Figure O. in whole or in part. All rights reserved. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.5 – fold in the stress relief Figure O.2 – spray metal pullback Figure O. This document is not an API Standard.4 – black face threads Figure O.1 – spray metal porosity Figure O. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. Representative Examples of Discontinuities Figure O. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.6 – overfill in the upset taper 169 .

7 – scab in the stress relief that has popped out Figure O.8 – sliver in the upset taper that has popped out Figure O.12 – underfill in the pin nose 170 . All rights reserved.9 – underfill in the upset bead Figure O. This document is not an API Standard. Copyright API. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.11 – underfill in the stress relief Figure O. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Figure O. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.10 – underfill in the pin shoulder Figure O. in whole or in part.

in whole or in part.18 – step face 171 . Copyright API.14 – underfill in the pin shoulder and wrench square Figure O. All rights reserved. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.15 – underfill in the upset taper Figure O. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.13 – underfill in the pin nose Figure O. This document is not an API Standard. Figure O.17 – worn rolling die Figure O.16 – incomplete face Figure O. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.

in whole or in part.26 – end shear crack extended through the upset Figure O.25 – end shear crack exposed during machining taper 172 . it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.19 – step face and surface roughness Figure O. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Figure O.22 – marks from a furnace conveyor system Figure O. Copyright API. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.20 – tool mark in the stress relief Figure O.23 – straightener burn Figure O. This document is not an API Standard.24 – end shear crack in raw bar stock Figure O.21 – dent in the rod body Figure O. All rights reserved.

outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. This document is not an API Standard.30 – overfill in the rod body Figure O. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.29 – mill scale impressions in the rod body Figure O. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. in whole or in part.31 – pit in the rod body from scale that has popped Figure O. All rights reserved.34 – seam in the rod body 173 .27 – fold in the rod body Figure O.28 – lap in the rod body Figure O.33 – rolled-in-scale in the bar stock Figure O.32 – atmospheric corrosion pitting in raw bar stock out Figure O. Figure O.

It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. Copyright API.35 – surface shearing from foreign matter in the Figure O. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard.36 – surface shearing from foreign matter in the sizing dies sizing dies 174 . This document is not an API Standard. in whole or in part. Figure O. All rights reserved.

This document is not an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted. All rights reserved. Copyright API. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. in whole or in part. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Annex P (informative) Sucker Rod Pumping System Illustration 175 .

asme. Pennsylvania 19428. 4 rd th American National Standards Institute. www. New York 10036. 3 Park Avenue. 1440 South Creek Drive. 8 th th The Society for Protective Coatings.org 176 .nace. Houston. Standard Test Method of for Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials by Portable Hardness Testers [11] ASTM E384. Requirements for the Calibration of Measuring and Test Equipment [5] API RP 11BR. www. Copyright API. Figure P.org. White Metal Blast Cleaning [16] SSPC-SP 11. Petroleum and natural gas industries – Materials for use in H2S-containing environments in oil and gas production – Part 3: Cracking-resistant CRAs (corrosion-resistant alloys) and other alloys 8 [15] SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 3 ASME International. 5 NCSL International. 77084-4906. All rights reserved. 3 Park Avenue. www. New York 10016-5990. in whole or in part. Single Sampling Plan for Normal Inspection 5 [4] ANSI/NCSL Z540. it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not received all approvals required to become an API Standard. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal 2 ASME International.4. Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products [8] ASTM E 10.org. Gages and Gaging for Unified Screw Threads 4 [3] ANSI/ASQ Z1. This document is not an API Standard. www. Suite 107. Standard Test Method for Knoop and Vickers Hardness of Materials 7 [12] NACE MR0175-1 .3 . Recommended Practice for Care and Handling of Sucker Rods [6] API Specification Q1. (UN and UNR Thread Form) 3 [2] ANSI/ASME B1. 6 ASTM International.1 . www. Specification for Quality Management System Requirements for Manufacturing Organizations for the Petroleum and Natural Gas Industry 6 [7] ASTM A370 .org.org.org. 100 Barr Harbor Drive. outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept.ansi. 2995 Wilderness Place. New York. 1 .asme. New York. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted.astm.ncsli. Petroleum and natural gas industries – Materials for use in H2S-containing environments in oil and gas production – Part 2: Cracking-resistant carbon and low alloy steels.2. and the use of cast irons [14] NACE MR0175-3. New York. New York 10016. www. Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials [9] ASTM E18. 7 NACE International. Unified Inch Screw Threads. Petroleum and natural gas industries – Materials for use in H2S-containing environments in oil and gas production – Part 1: General principles for selection of cracking-resistant materials [13] NACE MR0175-2.1 – Sucker Rod Pumping System Illustration Bibliography 2 [1] ANSI/ASME B1. Pennsylvania 15222-4656. Standard Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials [10] ASTM E 110-82.sspc. 40 24 Street.org. Colorado 80301-5404. 4 Floor. 25 West 43 Street. www. Pittsburg. 6 Floor. Boulder. West Conshohocken. Texas.